2.3. Molded Case Circuit Breakers. Contents

Transcription

1 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breaker Product Family Product Overview Eaton s molded case circuit breakers are designed to provide circuit protection for low voltage distribution systems. They are described by NEMA as,... a device for closing and interrupting a circuit between separable contacts under both normal and abnormal conditions, and furthermore as,... a breaker assembled as an integral unit in a supporting and enclosing housing of insulating material. The National Electrical Code (NEC) describes them as, A device designed to open and close a circuit by nonautomatic means, and to open the circuit automatically on a predetermined overload of current, without injury to itself when properly applied within its rating. So designed, Eaton circuit breakers protect conductors against overloads and conductors and connected apparatus, such as motors and motor starters, against short circuits. In low voltage distribution systems, there are many varied applications of molded case circuit breakers. Eaton offers the most comprehensive family of molded case circuit breakers in the industry. This section of circuit breakers includes: Thermal-magnetic trip breakers Electronic rms trip breakers Molded case switches Motor circuit protectors Current limiting breakers Special application breakers Modified Breakers Eaton breakers can be ordered with internal accessories installed. These modified breakers will be subject to an addition charge. Special Calibration Special non-ul-listed calibrations are available for certain ambient temperatures other than 40 C and for frequencies other than 50/60 Hz or DC. Reduced interrupting ratings will apply for 400 Hz applications. Contents Description Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( s) F-Frame (10 5 s) J-Frame (70 50 s) K-Frame ( s) L-Frame ( s) M-Frame ( s) N-Frame ( s) R-Frame ( s) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4).... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Learn Online Drawings Online 50 C Calibration Add suffix V to catalog for complete breaker, listed above, when ordering listed ampere ratings for breakers to be used in 50 C ambients. (No price adder.) (No UL label.) Moisture-Fungus Treatment All circuit breaker cases are molded from glass-polyester which does not support the growth of fungus. Any parts which are susceptible to the growth of fungus will require special treatment. Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers The circuit breakers may be ordered with freeze testing. This option uses special lubrication and mechanical operation is verified at 40 C. Marine Applications E- to R-Framed circuit breakers can be supplied to meet the following marine specifications: U.S. Coast Guard CFR 46; ABS American Bureau of Shipping; IEEE 45; DNV; Lloyds; and ABS/NVR Page V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-304 These specifications generally require molded case circuit breakers to be supplied with 50 C ambient, and plug-in adapter kits. When plug-in adapter kits are used, no terminals need be supplied (switchboard applications). Circuit breakers can also be supplied to meet UL 489 Supplement SA (Marine use) and UL 489 Supplement SB (Naval Use). UL 489 Supplement SA applies to vessels over 65 feet (19.8 m) in length. Requirements include 40 C ambient calibration, special labeling, and no use of aluminum conductors or terminals. (No 50 C.) H08 Or you can choose to add 50 C ambient but then there is no UL mark. VH08 UL 489 Supplement SB requires partial 50 C ambient calibration, vibration testing, special nameplating and no use of aluminum conductors or terminals. Eaton chooses to always fully calibrate to 50 C ambient. ( Naval labeled per UL, and UL now allows 50 C label here.) VH09 V4-T-116 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

2 .3 Certified Test Reports Eaton breakers can be ordered with certified test reports at the time of order entry. Test report documents the thermal and magnetic or electronic tripping characteristics of the individual breaker. Breaker and test report must be ordered together. Add suffix 1 to breaker catalog number and enter separate line item on order for certified test report. Standards and Certifications Molded case circuit breakers are designed to conform with the following standards: Underwriters Laboratories Inc., Standard UL 489, molded case circuit breakers and circuit breaker enclosures National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Standards Publication No. AB1-1993, molded case circuit breakers Australian Standard AS 184, molded case circuit breakers British Standards Institution Standard BS 475: Part 1, switchgear and control gear Part 1: circuit breakers Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Standard C. No. 5, service entrance and branch circuit breakers International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC , circuit breakers Japanese T-Mark Standard molded case circuit breakers South African Bureau of Standards, Standard SABS 156, Standard Specification for molded case circuit breakers Swiss Electro-Technical Association Standard SEV 157-1, safety regulations for circuit breakers Union Technique de l Electricite Standard NF C 63-10, low voltage switchgear and control gear circuit breaker requirements Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker (Association of German Electrical Engineers) Standard VDE 0660, low voltage switchgear and control gear, circuit breakers Conformance with these standards satisfies most local and international codes, assuming user acceptability and simplified application. Molded case circuit breakers equal or exceed Federal Specification Classification W-C-375b requirements for the particular class associated with the circuit breaker frame being considered. Open breakers do not have service entrance ratings. Service entrance rating is part of the enclosure. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-117

3 .3 Quick Reference Industrial Circuit Breakers G-Frame Circuit Breaker Type Continuous at 40 C No. of Poles Volts Type of Trip 1 1 N.I.T.U. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T.U. is interchangeable trip unit. Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 50 Vdc. AC DC Federal Specification W-C-375b UL Listed Interrupting s (rms Symmetrical s) AC (ka) DC (ka) 10 10/ Page GHB N.I.T.U. 11a V4-T-16 GHB , /50 N.I.T.U. 11a10b, 11b V4-T-16 GHB N.I.T.U. 1b, 14b V4-T-16 GHB , 3 480Y/77 15/50 N.I.T.U. 15b V4-T-16 HGHB N.I.T.U. 1c, 13a, 13b V4-T-16 GHBS , 480Y/ V4-T1-34 GBHS , 600Y/347 N.I.T.U. 10 V4-T1-34 GDB /50 N.I.T.U V4-T-14 GDB N.I.T.U V4-T-14 GD /50 N.I.T.U. 13b V4-T-13 GD N.I.T.U. 13b V4-T-13 GHC N.I.T.U. 1c, 13a V4-T-131 GHC , /50 N.I.T.U. 13b 65 1 V4-T-131 GHC N.I.T.U. 1c, 13a V4-T-131 GHC , 3 480Y/77 15/50 N.I.T.U. 13b V4-T-131 HGHC N.I.T.U V4-T-131 V4-T-118 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

4 .3 F-Frame Circuit Breaker Type Continuous at 40 C No. of Poles Volts Type of Trip 1 1 N.I.T.U. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T.U. is interchangeable trip unit. Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 50 Vdc. 3 Not defined in W-C-375b. 4 Current limiting. 5 Check with Eaton for availability. AC DC Federal Specification W-C-375b UL Listed Interrupting s (rms Symmetrical s) AC (ka) DC (ka) 10 10/ Page EDB 100 5, N.I.T.U. 10 V4-T-135 EDS 100 5, N.I.T.U V4-T-135 ED 15 5, N.I.T.U. 1b V4-T-135 EDH 100 5, N.I.T.U. 14b V4-T-135 EDC 100 5, N.I.T.U V4-T-135 EHD N.I.T.U. 13a V4-T-135 EHD , N.I.T.U. 13b V4-T-135 FDB , N.I.T.U. 18a V4-T-135 FDB N.I.T.U V4-T-135 FD N.I.T.U. 13a V4-T-135 FD 15 5, N.I.T.U. a V4-T-135 FD N.I.T.U V4-T-135 FDE N.I.T.U V4-T-135 HFD N.I.T.U. 13a V4-T-135 HFD 15 5, N.I.T.U. a V4-T-135 HFD N.I.T.U V4-T-135 HFDE N.I.T.U V4-T-135 FDC , N.I.T.U. 4a V4-T-135 FDC N.I.T.U V4-T-135 FDCE N.I.T.U V4-T-135 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-119

5 .3 J-Frame Circuit Breaker Type K-Frame L-Frame M-Frame 1 N.I.T.U. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T.U. is interchangeable trip unit. Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 50 Vdc. 3 Current limiting. Continuous at 40 C No. of Poles Volts AC DC Type of Trip 1 Federal Specification W-C-375b UL Listed Interrupting s (rms Symmetrical s) AC (ka) DC (ka) 10 10/ Page JDB 70 50, N.I.T.U. a V4-T-156 JD 70 50, 3, I.T.U. a V4-T-155 HJD 70 50, 3, I.T.U. a V4-T-155 JDC , 3, I.T.U. a V4-T-155 Circuit Breaker Type Continuous at 40 C No. of Poles Volts AC DC Type of Trip 1 Federal Specification W-C-375b UL Listed Interrupting s (rms Symmetrical s) AC (ka) DC (ka) 10 10/ Page DK , N.I.T.U. 14b V4-T-167 KDB , N.I.T.U. 3a V4-T-167 KD , 3, I.T.U. 3a V4-T-164, V4-T-165, V4-T-169, V4-T-17 CKD , 3, I.T.U. 3a V4-T-166, V4-T-175, V4-T-177 HKD , 3, I.T.U. 3a V4-T-164, V4-T-165, V4-T-169, V4-T-17 CHKD , 3, I.T.U. 3a V4-T-166, V4-T-175, V4-T-177 KDC , 3, I.T.U. 3a V4-T-164, V4-T-165, V4-T-169, V4-T-17 Circuit Breaker Type Continuous at 40 C No. of Poles Volts AC DC Type of Trip 1 Federal Specification W-C-375b UL Listed Interrupting s (rms Symmetrical s) AC (ka) DC (ka) 10 10/ Page LDB , N.I.T.U. 3a V4-T-190 LD , 3, I.T.U. 3a V4-T-188, V4-T-189, V4-T-194 CLD , 3, I.T.U. 3a V4-T-190, V4-T-00 HLD , 3, I.T.U. 3a V4-T-188, V4-T-189, V4-T-194 CHLD , 3, I.T.U. 3a V4-T-190, V4-T-00 LDC , 3, I.T.U. 3a V4-T-188, V4-T-189, V4-T-196 CLDC , 3, I.T.U. 3a V4-T-190, V4-T-0 Circuit Breaker Type Continuous at 40 C No. of Poles Volts AC DC Type of Trip 1 Federal Specification W-C-375b UL Listed Interrupting s (rms Symmetrical s) AC (ka) DC (ka) 10 10/ Page MDL , I.T.U. 3a V4-T-13, V4-T-15 CMDL , I.T.U. 3a V4-T-15 HMDL , I.T.U. 3a V4-T-13, V4-T-15 CHMDL , I.T.U. 3a V4-T-15 V4-T-10 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

6 .3 Molded Case Circuit Breaker Product Family Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( s) Selection Technical Data and Specifications F-Frame (10 5 s) J-Frame (70 50 s) K-Frame ( s) L-Frame ( s) M-Frame ( s) N-Frame ( s) R-Frame ( s) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4)..... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-1 V4-T-1 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-304 G-Frame ( s) Product Description All two- and three-pole circuit breakers are of the common trip type. On all three-phase delta (40 V) Grounded B phase applications, refer to Eaton Single-pole circuit breakers, 15 and 0 amperes. Switching duty rated (SWD) for fluorescent lighting applications All G-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use HACR rated Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-11

7 .3 Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Circuit Breaker/Frame GD GDB GHB GHC GHQ Circuit Breaker Type HGHB HGHC GHBGFEP GHCGFEP Technical Data and Specifications of Poles 1 = 1 pole = poles 3 = 3 poles UL 489 Interrupting Capacity s Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical s) Circuit Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC Breaker Type of Poles Y/ GDB, GD GD GHQ GHB GHB, HGHB GHC GHC, HGHC Terminal Types For line and load-side. Terminals are UL listed as suitable for wire type and size given below Terminal Types Circuit Breaker s Terminal Type Material Screw Head Type Wire Type AWG Wire Range Metric Wire Range (mm ) 4 Standard 15 0 Clamp (plated steel) Slotted Cu/Al Pressure (aluminum body) Slotted Cu/Al 10 1/ Optional GD Only Pressure (steel body) Slotted Cu HID suffix only applies to the GHB and GHC single-pole, 15 0 A circuit breakers. Time constant is 8 milliseconds minimum. 3 Two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. 4 Not UL listed sizes. GD K Trip s K = Molded case switch D = Ring type terminals C = Steel collars V = 1 F (50 C) J01= Fungus proofed R01= Shock tested F01= Freeze tester HID= High intensity discharge 1 V4-T-1 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

8 .3 Typical G-Frame Circuit Breaker Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( s) F-Frame (10 5 s) J-Frame (70 50 s) K-Frame ( s) L-Frame ( s) M-Frame ( s) N-Frame ( s) R-Frame ( s) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4)..... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Type GD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units ( s) Product Description Standards and Certifications Cable in, cable out Includes mounting hardware and BMHE Product Selection UL/CSA Type GD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 480 Vac, 50 Vdc Includes Binding 14 kaic at 480 Vac kaic at 480 Vac Head Screws and Clamps Includes Line and Load Terminals 10 3 x 0.31 Continuous Two-Pole Three-Pole Three-Pole at 40 C 15 GD015 GD3015 GD3015D 0 GD00 GD300 GD300D 5 GD05 GD305 GD305D 30 GD030 GD3030 GD3030D 35 GD035 GD3035 GD3035D 40 GD040 GD3040 GD3040D 45 GD045 GD3045 GD3045D 50 GD050 GD3050 GD3050D 60 GD3060 GD3060D 70 GD3070 GD3070D 80 GD3080 GD3080D 90 GD3090 GD3090D 100 GD3100 GD3100D Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-304 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-13

9 .3 Type GDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 480 Vac, 50 Vdc 14 kaic at 480 Vac Includes Line and Load Terminals Continuous Two-Pole Three-Pole at 40 C 15 GDB015 GDB GDB00 GDB300 5 GDB05 GDB GDB030 GDB GDB035 GDB GDB040 GDB GDB045 GDB GDB050 GDB GDB GDB GDB GDB GDB3100 Type GD Molded Case Switches Type GD Molded Case Switches Three-Pole 480 Vac, 50 Vdc Continuous at 40 C 60 GD3060K 60 GD3060KC GD3100K 100 GD3100KD 1 Includes line and load steel terminals. Includes binding head screws and clamps 10 3 x Molded case switches may open above 1300 amperes. (Includes Line and Load Terminals) V4-T-14 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

10 .3 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) GD-Frame, Three-Pole Front View Off 3.00 (76.) Side View.63 (66.7) 4.88 (13.8) Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-15

11 .3 Typical GHB Contents Types GHB and HGHB Bolt-On Panelboard Circuit Breakers ( s) Standards and Certifications These breakers meet the requirements of Federal Specification W-C-375b as follows: Type GHB, 10 and 40 V: Single-pole: Class 11a Two-, three-pole: Classes 10b, 11b, 1b, 14b, 15b UL/CSA Type GHB, 77 and 480Y/77V: Single-pole: Classes 1c, 13a Two-, three-pole: Class 13b Type HGHB 77V Type GHQ 77V Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( s) F-Frame (10 5 s) J-Frame (70 50 s) K-Frame ( s) L-Frame ( s) M-Frame ( s) N-Frame ( s) R-Frame ( s) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4).... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-304 V4-T-16 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

12 .3 Product Selection Typical GHB Type GHB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 1 Continuous at 40 C 77/480 Vac, 77/480 Vac, 15 Vdc 15/50 Vdc Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole 77/480 Vac, 15/50 Vdc 3 15 GHB GHB015 4 GHB GHB GHB00 4 GHB GHB105 GHB05 GHB GHB1030 GHB030 GHB GHB1035 GHB035 GHB GHB1040 GHB040 GHB GHB1045 GHB045 GHB GHB1050 GHB050 GHB GHB1060 GHB060 GHB GHB1070 GHB070 GHB GHB1080 GHB080 GHB GHB1090 GHB090 GHB GHB1100 GHB100 GHB3100 Type HGHB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 77 Vac, 15 Vdc Continuous at 40 C Single-Pole 15 HGHB HGHB HGHB HGHB Y/77 V, circuit breakers (Type GHB) not suitable for three-phase delta (480 V). 15 through 70 ampere circuit breakers only. 3 Use two outside poles. 4 Uses (4.83) 3 screw type clamp terminals. 5 Add suffix HID for High Intensity Discharge (HID) applications. 15 and 0 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated and 0 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-17

13 .3 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) GDB-Frame, Three-Pole Front View 3.00 (76.) Max. Side View.63 (66.7) 4.00 (101.6) V4-T-18 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

14 .3 Single-Phase (requires two poles) Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( s) F-Frame (10 5 s) J-Frame (70 50 s) K-Frame ( s) L-Frame ( s) M-Frame ( s) N-Frame ( s) R-Frame ( s) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4)..... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Type GHBGFEP Bolt-On Panelboard 30 ma Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors ( s) Product Description Standards and Certifications amperes, 77 V, These circuit breakers meet 50/60 Hz the requirements of UL 489 Operational voltage and UL V to 305 V Product Selection Type GHBGFEP Bolt-On Panelboard 30 ma Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Continuous at 40 C 15 GHBGFEP GHBGFEP GHBGFEP GHBGFEP GHBGFEP GHBGFEP1060 Technical Data and Specifications Single-Phase (Requires Two Poles) 77 Vac, 30 ma Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical s) Type of Poles 77 Vac (50/60 Hz) GHBGFEP 1 14,000 Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-304 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-19

15 .3 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) GHB-Frame, Three-Pole Front View 3.00 (76.) Side View.63 (66.7) 4.00 (101.6) V4-T-130 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

16 .3 Typical GHC Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( s) F-Frame (10 5 s) J-Frame (70 50 s) K-Frame ( s) L-Frame ( s) M-Frame ( s) N-Frame ( s) R-Frame ( s) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4)..... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-304 Types GHC and HGHC Circuit Breakers ( s) Product Description Standards and Certifications These breakers meet the requirements of Federal Specification W-C-37b as follows: amperes 10, 40, 77, 480Y/77V, 50/60 Hz, 15, 15/50 Vdc Single-, two- and three-pole Cable in, cable out Does not include mounting hardware Type GHC, 77 and 480Y/ 77V: Single-pole: Classes 1c, 13a Two-, three-pole: Class 13b UL/CSA Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-131

17 .3 Product Selection Type GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 77 Vac, 480Y/77 Vac, 15 Vdc 1 15/50 Vdc Continuous at 40 C Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Type HGHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 77 Vac, 15 Vdc 1 15 through 70 ampere circuit breakers only. Use two outside poles. 3 Uses screw type clamp terminals. 4 Add suffix HID for High Intensity Discharge (HID) applications. 15 and 0 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated and 0 ampere, single-pole are SWD rated. 480Y/77 Vac, 15/50 Vdc 15 GHC GHC015 3 GHC GHC GHC00 3 GHC GHC105 GHC05 GHC GHC1030 GHC030 GHC GHC1035 GHC035 GHC GHC1040 GHC040 GHC GHC1045 GHC045 GHC GHC1050 GHC050 GHC GHC1060 GHC060 GHC GHC1070 GHC070 GHC GHC1080 GHC080 GHC GHC1090 GHC090 GHC GHC1100 GHC100 GHC3100 Continuous at 40 C Single-Pole 15 HGHC HGHC HGHC HGHC1030 V4-T-13 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

18 .3 Single-Phase (requires two-pole spaces) Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( s) F-Frame (10 5 s) J-Frame (70 50 s) K-Frame ( s) L-Frame ( s) M-Frame ( s) N-Frame ( s) R-Frame ( s) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4)..... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Type GHCGFEP Cable-In/Cable-Out 30 ma Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors ( s) Product Description Standards and Certifications amperes, 77 V, These circuit breakers meet 50/60 Hz the requirements of UL 489 Operational voltage and UL V Product Selection Type GHCGFEP 30 ma Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Continuous at 40 C 15 GHCGFEP GHCGFEP GHCGFEP GHCGFEP GHCGFEP GHCGFEP1060 Technical Data and Specifications Single-Phase (Requires Two Poles) 77V, 30 ma Interrupting Capacity s Circuit Breaker Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical s) Type of Poles 77 Vac (50/60 Hz) GHCGFEP 1 14,000 Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-304 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-133

19 .3 Special Purpose Circuit Breakers Special Purpose GHC Circuit Breakers ( s) Product Selection Product Description Eaton s Type GHC circuit breakers have binding head screw-type terminals on line and load side. These circuit breakers with screw-type terminals ( ) will be marked Special purpose breaker not for general use. To order this special breaker, use the catalog number from the tables on this page. Contents Type GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Continuous at 40 C Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( s) F-Frame (10 5 s) J-Frame (70 50 s) K-Frame ( s) L-Frame ( s) M-Frame ( s) N-Frame ( s) R-Frame ( s) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4)..... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Type GHB and GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units for HID Lighting Applications Note 1 Use two outside poles. 77 Vac, 15 Vdc 480Y/77 Vac, 15/50 Vdc Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T Y/77 Vac, 15/50 Vdc 1 5 GHC105D GHC05D GHC305D 30 GHC1030D GHC030D GHC3030D 35 GHC1035D GHC035D GHC3035D 40 GHC1040D GHC040D GHC3040D 45 GHC1045D GHC045D GHC3045D 50 GHC1050D GHC050D GHC3050D 60 GHC1060D GHC060D GHC3060D 70 GHC1070D GHC070D GHC3070D 80 GHC1080D GHC080D GHC3080D 90 GHC1090D GHC090D GHC3090D 100 GHC1100D GHC100D GHC3100D Type Continuous at 40 C 77 Vac Single-Pole Cable-in 15 GHC1015HID 0 GHC100HID Bolt-on 15 GHB1015HID 0 GHB100HID V4-T-134 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

20 .3 Typical F-Frame Breaker F-Frame Breaker with Electronic Trip Unit Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( s) F-Frame (10 5 s) Selection Product Selection Accessories Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions and Weights J-Frame (70 50 s) K-Frame ( s) L-Frame ( s) M-Frame ( s) N-Frame ( s) R-Frame ( s) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4)..... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-136 V4-T-138 V4-T-149 V4-T-150 V4-T-15 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-304 F-Frame (10 5 s) Product Description All Eaton s F-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated All circuit breakers 10 through 30 amperes are suitable for HID (high intensity discharge) use All F-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-135

21 .3 Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. FD-Frame Circuit Breakers with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology Circuit Breaker Type EHD FDB FD HFD FDC of Poles 1 = 1 pole = poles 3 = 3 poles 4 = 4 poles Trip s (FD, HFD, FDC, two-, three-, four-pole only) 00 (FD, HFD, FDC, two-, three-, four-pole only) 5 (FD, HFD, FDC, two-, three-, four-pole only) Circuit Breaker Type EDB EDS ED EDH EDC FDC L EDC 3 00 L of Poles = poles 3 = 3 poles Trip s E = 100% protected (four-pole only) neutral pole EH = 50% protected (four-pole only) K = High magnetic molded case switch L = Line and load terminals S = Stainless steel terminals V = 50 C calibration W = Without terminals Y = Line terminals only Z = Aluminum terminals ( 100 amperes) L = Line and load terminals W = Without terminals Y = Line terminals only Z = Aluminum terminals (100 amperes) V4-T-136 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

22 .3 This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. FD-Frame Circuit Breakers with 10+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology Performance at 480 Vac FDE = 35 kaic HFDE = 65 kaic FDCE = 100 kaic of Poles 3 = 3 poles HFDE 3 5 L Trip Units FD-Frame Circuit Breakers with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology Performance at 480 Vac FDE = 35 kaic HFDE = 65 kaic FDCE = 100 kaic Trip Unit 1 = 10+ LI = 10+ LSI HFDE ZG W of Poles 3 = 3 poles Trip Units 080 Trip Unit Trip Unit Features = 310+ LSI ZG = Zone 5 33 = 310+ LS selective 35 = 310+ LSG 36 = 310+ LSIG interlocking Blank = No option Features W = Without terminals L = Line and load terminals Blank = Load side terminals only Features W = Without terminals L = Line and load terminals Blank = Load side terminals only Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-137

23 .3 Product Selection Type ED Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed 40 Vac, 15 Vdc (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 65 kaic at 40 Vac Two-Pole Three-Pole Continuous at 40 C 15 ED015 ED ED00 ED300 5 ED05 ED ED030 ED ED035 ED ED040 ED ED050 ED ED060 ED ED100 ED ED15 ED ED150 ED ED175 ED ED00 ED300 5 ED5 ED35 Type EDH Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed 40 Vac, 15 Vdc (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 100 kaic at 40 Vac Two-Pole Three-Pole Continuous at 40 C EDH100 EDH EDH15 EDH EDH150 EDH EDH175 EDH EDH00 EDH300 5 EDH5 EDH35 V4-T-138 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

24 .3 Type EDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed 40 Vac, 15 Vdc (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 00 kaic at 40 Vac Two-Pole Three-Pole Continuous at 40 C EDC100 EDC EDC15 EDC EDC150 EDC EDC175 EDC EDC00 EDC300 5 EDC5 EDC35 Type EDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed 40 Vac, 15 Vdc (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) kaic at 40 Vac Two-Pole Three-Pole Continuous at 40 C 100 EDB100 EDB EDB110 EDB EDB15 EDB EDB150 EDB EDB175 EDB EDB00 EDB300 5 EDB5 EDB35 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-139

25 .3 Type EDS Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed 40 Vac, 15 Vdc (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 4 kaic at 40 Vac Two-Pole Three-Pole Continuous at 40 C Type EHD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 77 Vac, 15 Vdc 480 Vac, 50 Vdc 14 kaic at 77 Vac 14 kaic at 480 Vac Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole 1 Not UL listed. 5 kaic interrupting rating. UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 40.83(d). 100 EDS100 EDS EDS110 EDS EDS15 EDS EDS150 EDS EDS175 EDS EDS00 EDS300 5 EDS5 EDS35 Continuous at 40 C 10 1 EHD1010 EHD010 EHD EHD1015 EHD015 EHD EHD100 EHD00 EHD300 5 EHD105 EHD05 EHD EHD1030 EHD030 EHD EHD1035 EHD035 EHD EHD1040 EHD040 EHD EHD1045 EHD045 EHD EHD1050 EHD050 EHD EHD1060 EHD060 EHD EHD1070 EHD070 EHD EHD1080 EHD080 EHD EHD1090 EHD090 EHD EHD1100 EHD100 EHD3100 V4-T-140 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

26 .3 Type FDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 600 Vac, 50 Vdc 14 kaic at 600 Vac Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Continuous at 40 C 1 Not UL listed. 5 kaic interrupting rating. UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 40.83(d) FDB010 FDB3010 FDB FDB015 FDB3015 FDB FDB00 FDB300 FDB400 5 FDB05 FDB305 FDB FDB030 FDB3030 FDB FDB035 FDB3035 FDB FDB040 FDB3040 FDB FDB045 FDB3045 FDB FDB050 FDB3050 FDB FDB060 FDB3060 FDB FDB070 FDB3070 FDB FDB080 FDB3080 FDB FDB090 FDB3090 FDB FDB100 FDB3100 FDB FDB110 FDB3110 FDB FDB15 FDB315 FDB FDB150 FDB3150 FDB4150 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-141

27 .3 Type FD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 77 Vac, 15 Vdc 600 Vac, 50 Vdc 35 kaic at 77 Vac 35 kaic at 480 Vac Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Continuous at 40 C 1 Not UL listed. 5 kaic interrupting rating. UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 40.83(d) FD FD1015 FD015 FD3015 FD FD100 FD00 FD300 FD400 5 FD105 FD05 FD305 FD FD1030 FD030 FD3030 FD FD1035 FD035 FD3035 FD FD1040 FD040 FD3040 FD FD1045 FD045 FD3045 FD FD1050 FD050 FD3050 FD FD1060 FD060 FD3060 FD FD1070 FD070 FD3070 FD FD1080 FD080 FD3080 FD FD1090 FD090 FD3090 FD FD1100 FD100 FD3100 FD FD1110 FD110 FD3110 FD FD115 FD15 FD315 FD FD1150 FD150 FD3150 FD FD175 FD3175 FD FD00 FD300 FD400 5 FD5 FD35 FD45 V4-T-14 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

28 .3 Type HFD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 77 Vac, 15 Vdc 600 Vac, 50 Vdc 65 kaic at 77 Vac 65 kaic at 480 Vac Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Continuous at 40 C Note 1 UL listed for SWD applications, see NEC Article 40.83(d). 15 HFD HFD015 HFD3015 HFD HFD100 1 HFD00 HFD300 HFD400 5 HFD105 HFD05 HFD305 HFD HFD1030 HFD030 HFD3030 HFD HFD1035 HFD035 HFD3035 HFD HFD1040 HFD040 HFD3040 HFD HFD1045 HFD045 HFD3045 HFD HFD1050 HFD050 HFD3050 HFD HFD1060 HFD060 HFD3060 HFD HFD1070 HFD070 HFD3070 HFD HFD1080 HFD080 HFD3080 HFD HFD1090 HFD090 HFD3090 HFD HFD1100 HFD100 HFD3100 HFD HFD1110 HFD110 HFD3110 HFD HFD115 HFD15 HFD315 HFD HFD1150 HFD150 HFD3150 HFD HFD175 HFD3175 HFD HFD00 HFD300 HFD400 5 HFD5 HFD35 HFD45 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-143

29 .3 Type FDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units (Includes Terminals on Load End Only) 600 Vac, 50 Vdc 100 kaic at 480 Vac Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Continuous at 40 C 15 FDC015 FDC3015 FDC FDC00 FDC300 FDC400 5 FDC05 FDC305 FDC FDC030 FDC3030 FDC FDC035 FDC3035 FDC FDC040 FDC3040 FDC FDC045 FDC3045 FDC FDC050 FDC3050 FDC FDC060 FDC3060 FDC FDC070 FDC3070 FDC FDC080 FDC3080 FDC FDC090 FDC3090 FDC FDC100 FDC3100 FDC FDC110 FDC3110 FDC FDC15 FDC315 FDC FDC15 FDC3150 FDC FDC175 FDC3175 FDC FDC00 FDC300 FDC400 5 FDC5 FDC35 FDC45 V4-T-144 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

30 .3 Types FDE, HFDE and FDCE 310+ Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-151. Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only Standard LS Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay Ramp Types FDE, HFDE, and FDCE 10+ Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Digitrip RMS 10+ Trip Unit Only Standard Optional 10+ Trip Electronic Trip Units Amperage Settings Circuit Breaker Type Frame s FDE, HFDE, FDCE 5 100, 110, 15, 150, 175, 00, 5 FDE, HFDE, FDCE , 80, 90, 100, 110, 15, 150 FDE, HFDE, FDCE , 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 Optional LSI LSG LSIG Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection FDE 310+ Electronic Breaker with Zone Selective Interlocking Digitrip 310+ Electronic Trip Units Amperage Settings Circuit Breaker Type Frame s FDE, HFDE, FDCE 5 100, 110, 15, 150, 160, 175, 00, 5 FDE, HFDE, FDCE , 70, 80, 90, 100, 15, 150, 160 FDE, HFDE, FDCE 80 15, 0, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80 Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Ground Fault Protection Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 35 kaic at 480 Vac / 18 kaic at 600 Vac 80 FDE FDE30803 FDE FDE CTF FDE FDE31603 FDE FDE CTF160 5 FDE3533 FDE353 FDE3535 FDE3536 CTF5 65 kaic at 480 Vac / 5 kaic at 600 Vac 80 HFDE HFDE30803 HFDE HFDE CTF HFDE HFDE31603 HFDE HFDE CTF160 5 HFDE3533 HFDE353 HFDE3535 HFDE3536 CTF5 100 kaic at 480 Vac / 5 kaic at 600 Vac 80 FDCE FDCE30803 FDCE FDCE CTF FDCE FDCE31603 FDCE FDCE CTF160 5 FDCE3533 FDCE353 FDCE3535 FDCE3536 CTF5 LI Adjustable Instantaneous 35 kaic at 480 Vac / 18 kaic at 600 Vac 100 FDE31001 FDE FDE FDE351 FDE35 65 kaic at 480 Vac / 5 kaic at 600 Vac 100 HFDE31001 HFDE HFDE HFDE351 HFDE kaic at 480 Vac / 5 kaic at 600 Vac 100 FDCE31001 FDCE FDCE FDCE351 FDCE35 LSI Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay LSI w/zsi LSIG w/zsi 35 kaic at 480 Vac / 18 kaic at 600 Vac 80 FDE30803ZG FDE308036ZG 160 FDE31603ZG FDE316036ZG 5 FDE353ZG FDE3536ZG 65 kaic at 480 Vac / 5 kaic at 600 Vac 80 HFDE30803ZG HFDE308036ZG 160 HFDE31603ZG HFDE316036ZG 5 HFDE353ZG HFDE3536ZG 100 kaic at 480 Vac / 5 kaic at 600 Vac 80 FDCE30803ZG FDCE308036ZG 160 FDCE31603ZG FDCE316036ZG 5 FDCE353ZG FDCE3536ZG 1 For 10+ trip unit, 150 A not available with LSI trip unit; entire range is covered by 100 A and 5 A frames. Contact the product line for availability. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-145

31 .3 Molded Case Switches Eaton s molded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489. Molded Case Switches Complete Circuit Breaker with Load Side Terminals Only 480 Vac, 50 Vdc 600 Vac, 50 Vdc Continuous at 40 C Note Molded case switches will open above 1800 amperes. Two-Pole 100 EHD100K FD100K HFD100K 150 FD150K HFD150K 5 FD5K HFD5K Three-Pole 100 EHD3100K FD3100K HFD3100K 150 FD3150K HFD3150K 5 FD35K HFD35K Four-Pole 100 FD4100K HFD4100K 150 FD4150K HFD4150K 5 FD45K HFD45K V4-T-146 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

32 .3 Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information Line and Load Terminals Line and load terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. Except as noted, terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards UL 486A and UL 486B. Unless otherwise specified, F-Frame circuit breakers are factory equipped with load terminals only. Line and Load Terminals Breaker s Terminal Body Material Ordering Information F-Frame circuit breakers and molded case switches have load terminals only as standard equipment. When standard line-end terminals (same as standard load-end terminals) are required, add L to the circuit breaker catalog number. When nonstandard or optional line and/ or load terminals are required, order by style number. Specify if factory installation is required. Wire Type AWG Wire Range Metric Wire Range mm Package of Three Terminals Standard Pressure Type Terminals 0 (EHD) Steel Cu/AI T0FB 100 Steel Cu/AI 14 1/ T100FB 5 Aluminum Cu/AI 4 4/ TA5FD Optional Pressure Terminals 50 Aluminum Cu/AI TA50FB 100 Aluminum Cu/AI 14 1/ TA100FD 00 Stainless steel Cu 4 4/ T150FB 5 Copper Cu 4 4/ T5FD 5 Aluminum Cu/AI kcmil TA5FDK 3 1 Use on FDE, HFDE and FDCE electronic trip only. Not for use with ED, EDH, EDC breakers. 3 Includes terminal shield kit. Adds approximately 3 inches (76.) to breaker height. Available for use on three-pole breaker only. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-147

33 .3 Line and Load Terminals Screw Conductor Washer Conductor Conductor Wire Clamp Screw 3T0FB 3T100FB, 3T150FB 3TA5FD Assemble wire clamp to bottom of conductor as shown. Collar Insert collar enclosing conductor as shown. Locate nut on top of conductor and tighten securely with screw and washer. Caution: Collar must surround conductor. Conductor Washer Washer Screw Screw 3TA50FB 3TA100FD 3TA5FDK (Up to 150 mm ) Assemble collar on top of conductor as shown. Tighten securely with screw and washer. Collar Conductor Collar Nut Collar slides onto conductor and is held in position by a screw and lockwasher. Collar Extrusion Clip Insert collar enclosing conductor and center on extrusion on collar. Install clip with legs on top of conductor and snap end around bottom of collar. Assemble collar on top of conductor as shown. Tighten securely with screw and washer. Terminal shield must be used with this collar. Note: For 185 mm, use 3TA5FDK1. V4-T-148 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

34 .3 Accessories Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. Allowable Accessory Combinations FD Frame Accessories Description Legend Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole not both Accessory available/modification available Reference Page Note 1 Internal accessories are listed with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) for factory installation. They are not listed with UL for field installation. Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole 1 Four-Pole Center Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral Internal Accessories (Only one internal accessory per pole) Alarm lockout switch (make only) V4-T-75 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-75 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-75 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T-77 Auxiliary switch (A, B) V4-T-77 Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T-79 Shunt trip standard V4-T-81 Shunt trip low energy V4-T-85 Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T-87 External Accessories End cap kit V4-T-308 Keeper nut V4-T-308 Control wire terminal kit V4-T-309 Multiwire connectors V4-T-310 Rear fed terminals V4-T-310 Base mounting hardware V4-T-310 Terminal shields V4-T-31 Terminal end covers V4-T-313 Interphase barriers V4-T-313 Non-padlockable handle block V4-T-314 Snap-on padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T-314 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T-315 Cylinder lock V4-T-315 Key interlock kit V4-T-316 Sliding bar interlock requires two breakers V4-T-317 Walking beam interlock requires two breakers V4-T-317 Electrical (solenoid and motor) operators V4-T-318 Plug-in adapters V4-T-319 Rear connecting studs V4-T-31 Panelboard connecting straps V4-T-3 Handle mechanisms V4-T-430 LFD current limiter V4-T-34 IQ Energy Sentinel V4-T-34 Cause of trip display V4-T-35 Remote mount cause of trip display V4-T-35 Cause of trip LED V4-T-35 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special calibration Moisture fungus treatment V4-T-116 Freeze-tested circuit breakers Marine/naval application Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-149

35 .3 Technical Data and Specifications UL 489 Interrupting Capacity s Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical s) Circuit Breaker Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC 1 Type of Poles EDB, 3 10 EDS, ED, EDH, EDC, EHD , FDB, 3, FD , 3, FDE HFD , 3, HFDE FDC 5, 3, FDCE IEC (P1) Interrupting Capacity s (P1) Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical s) Circuit Breaker Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC 1 Type of Poles 0, , EDB, 3 10 EDS, ED, EDH, EDC, EHD , FDB, 3, FD , 3, HFD , 3, FDC, 3, and 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories Description number Electronic portable test kit MTST30V Trip unit tamper protection wire seal 5108A03H01 External neutral sensor (80 A) 7 CTF080 External neutral sensor (160 A) 7 CTF160 External neutral sensor (5 A) 7 CTF5 Compact external neutral sensor (80 A) 7 CTFD080 Compact external neutral sensor (160 A) 7 CTFD160 Compact external neutral sensor (5 A) 7 CTFD5 Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication TRIP-LED Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW Remote-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEWR06 1 DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. 3 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds minimum at ka. 4 Electronics available on three-pole only, no DC rating for FDE, HFDE, FDCE. 5 Current limiting. 6 Check with Eaton for availability. 7 Neutral sensor required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired; sold separately. V4-T-150 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

36 .3 FDE 10+ and 310+ Specifications Description Digitrip RMS 10+ Digitrip RMS 310+ Breaker type Frame designation FD FD Frames available 100 A, 150 A, 5 A 80 A, 160 A, 5 A Continuous current range (A) 40 5 A 15 5 A Ground fault pickup (A) N/A 16 5 A Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kaic) 35, 65, , 65, 100 Protection Ordering options LI, LSI LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System No No (or Maintenance Mode) Interchangeable trip unit No No High load alarm (suffix B0) No No Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B1) No No Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B) No No Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) No LSI, LSIG Cause of trip indication No Yes Thru-cover accessories No No Test kit available Yes Yes FDE 10+ Adjustability Specifications FD Frame 10+ settings 100 A 150 A 5 A I r = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) (all 10+) I r A B C D E F G (= I n ) I i (x I n )= Instantaneous pickup I i (10+ LI version) J x K.5x L 3x M 3.5x N 4x O 5x P 6x Q 8x R 10x S 1x Fixed instantaneous override (all 10+) Isd (x Ir) / tsd = SD profile I sd / t sd (10+ LSI version) J x / 150 N/A x / 150 K x / 300 N/A x / 300 L x / I t N/A x / I t M 4x / Inst N/A 4x / Inst N 4x / 150 N/A 4x / 150 O 4x / I t N/A 4x / I t P 6x / Inst N/A 6x / Inst Q 6x / 300 N/A 6x / 300 R 10x / 150 N/A 10x / 150 S 10x / 300 N/A 10x / 300 FDE 310+ Adjustability Specifications FD Frame 310+ Settings 80 A 160 A 5 A I r = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) I r (All 310+) A B C D E F G H (= I n ) t r = long delay time (seconds) Position 1 (All 310+) Position Position Position Position Position Position Position I sd (x I r ) = short delay pickup Position 1 x x x (All 310+) Position 3x 3x 3x Position 3 4x 4x 4x Position 4 5x 5x 5x Position 5 6x 6x 6x Position 6 7x 7x 7x Position 7 8x 8x 8x Position 8 10x 10x 10x Position 9 1x 1x 1x t sd = short delay time I t (milliseconds) (LS, LSG) t sd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) (LSI, LSIG) Fixed 67 at10x 67 at10x 67 at10x Position 1 Inst Inst Inst Position Position I g = gound fault pickup (amperes) Position (LSG, LSIG) Position Position Position Position Position t g = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst Inst Inst (LSG, LSIG) Position Position Independently Adjustable Instantaneous (I i ) setting 1 Maintenance Mode pickup (.5 x I n ) (amperes) 1 Not available for FD. Independently adjustable I i setting available in LG, NG and RG ALSI and ALSIG trip units. Maintenance Mode not available for FD frames. It is available for KD, LD, MDL, LG, NG and RG. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-151

37 .3 Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) FD Frame of Poles Width Height Depth (35.1) 6.00 (15.4) 3.38 (86.0).75 (70.0) 6.00 (15.4) 3.38 (86.0) (105.0) 6.00 (15.4) 3.38 (86.0) (139.7) 6.00 (15.4) 3.38 (86.0) FD Frame, Three-Pole Approximate Shipping Weight Lbs (kg) FD Frame Breaker Type Front View On Off 4.13 (104.9) 6.00 (15.4) of Poles ED, EDB, EDS, EDH, EDC 3 (1.4) 4.5 (.0) EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC (0.9) 3 (1.4) 4.5 (.0) 6 (.7) FDE, HFDE, FDCE 4.5 (.0) Side View 3.38 (85.7) V4-T-15 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

38 .3 Typical J-Frame Breaker Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( s) F-Frame (10 5 s) J-Frame (70 50 s) Selection Product Selection Accessories Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions and Weights K-Frame ( s) L-Frame ( s) M-Frame ( s) N-Frame ( s) R-Frame ( s) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4)..... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-154 V4-T-155 V4-T-158 V4-T-159 V4-T-160 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-304 J-Frame (70 50 s) Product Description All Eaton s J-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated J-Frame circuit breakers are available as individual components (frame, trip unit, terminals), or factory assembled complete breakers J-Frame circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units are suitable for reverse feed use Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-153

39 .3 Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Circuit Breaker/Frame Trip Unit Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type JDB JD HJD JDC Trip Unit Type JT = Thermal-magnetic of Poles = poles 3 = 3 poles 4 = 4 poles JD 3 50 F Circuit Breaker/Frame of Poles = poles 3 = 3 poles 4 = 4 poles JT 3 50 T Trip Unit / Plug C = Non-aluminum terminals F = Frame only K = High magnetic molded case switch V = 50 C calibration W= Without terminals X = Load side terminals only Y = Line side terminals only T =Trip unit thermal-magnetic fixed thermal adj. magnetic V = 50 C calibration (thermal-magnetic trip units only) V4-T-154 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

40 .3 Product Selection Types JD, HJD and JDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Continuous at 40 C Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 1 1 Magnetic trip adjustable 5 10 times continuous ampere rating. Individually packed. 3 Fully rated neutral pole with no protection. 4 Neutral is in right pole. High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 1 Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 1 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Only 1 For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames Standard Terminals Only See Page V4-T-157 for Optional Terminals Two-Pole 70 JD070 HJD070 JDC070 JT070T TA50KB 90 JD090 HJD090 JDC090 JT090T 100 JD100 HJD100 JDC100 JT100T 15 JD15 HJD15 JDC15 JT15T 150 JD150 HJD150 JDC150 JT150T 175 JD175 HJD175 JDC175 JT175T 00 JD00 HJD00 JDC00 JT00T 5 JD5 HJD5 JDC5 JT5T 50 JD50 HJD50 JDC50 JT50T Three-Pole 70 JD3070 HJD3070 JDC3070 JT3070T TA50KB 90 JD3090 HJD3090 JDC3090 JT3090T 100 JD3100 HJD3100 JDC3100 JT3100T 15 JD315 HJD315 JDC315 JT315T 150 JD3150 HJD3150 JDC3150 JT3150T 175 JD3175 HJD3175 JDC3175 JT3175T 00 JD300 HJD300 JDC300 JT300T 5 JD35 HJD35 JDC35 JT35T 50 JD350 HJD350 JDC350 JT350T Four-Pole JD415 HJD415 JDC415 JT315T TA50KB 150 JD4150 HJD4150 JDC4150 JT3150T 175 JD4175 HJD4175 JDC4175 JT3175T 00 JD400 HJD400 JDC400 JT300T 5 JD45 HJD45 JDC45 JT35T 50 JD450 HJD450 JDC450 JT350T Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-155

41 .3 Types JD, HJD and JDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Frame Only Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Two-Pole JD50F HJD50F JDC50F Three-Pole JD350F HJD350F JDC350F Four-Pole JD450F HJD450F JDC450F Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac Type JDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non- Interchangeable Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed Application 600 Vac Rated, 50 Vdc Complete Circuit Breaker Continuous at 40 C Without Line and Load Terminals Two-Pole 70 JDB070W JDB JDB090W JDB JDB100W JDB JDB15W JDB JDB150W JDB JDB175W JDB JDB00W JDB00 5 JDB5W JDB5 50 JDB50W JDB50 Three-Pole 70 JDB3070W JDB JDB3090W JDB JDB3100W JDB JDB315W JDB JDB3150W JDB JDB3175W JDB JDB300W JDB300 5 JDB35W JDB35 50 JDB350W JDB350 With Standard Line and Load Terminals Only Molded Case Switches Eaton s molded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker Molded Case Switches 600 Vac, 50 Vdc Continuous at 40 C Complete Circuit Breaker Only Without Line and Load Terminals Suitable for Reverse Feed Use 1 Individually packed. Molded case switches may open above 500 amperes. components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489. Standard Terminals Only See PageV4-T-157 for Optional Terminals Two-Pole 50 JD50KW JDB50KW TA50KB 1 HJD50KW HJDB50KW Three-Pole 50 JD350KW JDB350KW TA50KB 1 HJD350KW HJDB350KW Four-Pole 50 JD450KW JDB450KW TA50KB 1 HJD450KW HJDB450KW V4-T-156 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

42 .3 Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information Line and Load Terminals Eaton s line and load terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. All terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards UL 486A and UL 486B and CSA Standard C. No. 65, or Electrical Bulletin Slotted Screw T50KB Terminal Line and Load Terminals Breaker s Collar Terminal Body Material Nut Unless otherwise specified, J- Frame circuit breaker line and load terminals are shipped separately for field installation. The bottom of the standard TA50KB terminal contains a recess that is positioned over the J-Frame circuit breaker terminal conductor. TA50KB Terminal (Standard) Wire Type AWG Wire Range/ No. Conductors Ordering Information J-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper-only terminals are required, order by catalog number. Specify if factory installation is required. Metric Wire Range mm Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals 50 Aluminum Cu/AI kcmil TA50KB Optional Cu Pressure Terminals 50 Stainless Steel Cu kcmil T50KB Collar Slotted Screw Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-157

43 .3 Accessories Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. JD Frame Accessories Description Legend Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole not both Accessory available/modification available Reference Page Two-, Three-Pole Four-Pole Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-75 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T-77 Auxiliary switch (A, B) V4-T-77 Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T-79 Shunt trip standard V4-T-8 Shunt trip low energy V4-T-85 Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T-89 External Accessories End cap kit V4-T-308 Plug nut V4-T-309 Control wire terminal kit V4-T-309 Multiwire connectors V4-T-310 Base mounting hardware V4-T-311 Terminal shields V4-T-31 Interphase barriers V4-T-313 Non-padlockable handle block V4-T-314 Padlockable handle block V4-T-314 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T-315 Cylinder lock V4-T-315 Key interlock kit V4-T-316 Sliding bar interlock requires two breakers V4-T-317 Electrical (solenoid) operator V4-T-319 Plug-in adapters V4-T-319 Rear connecting studs V4-T-31 Panelboard connecting straps V4-T-3 Handle mechanisms V4-T-430 Handle extension V4-T-445 IQ Energy Sentinel V4-T-34 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special calibration Moisture fungus treatment V4-T-116 Freeze-tested circuit breakers Marine/naval application V4-T-158 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

44 .3 Technical Data and Specifications UL 489 Interrupting Capacity s Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical s) Circuit Breaker Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC Type of Poles JDB, JD, 3, HJD, 3, JDC 3, 3, IEC (P1) Interrupting Capacity s Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical s) Circuit Breaker Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC Type of Poles JD, 3, HJD, 3, JDC, 3, Two-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds minimum at ka. 3 Current limiting. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-159

45 .3 Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) JD Frame of Poles Width Height Depth, (105.0) (54.0) 4.06 (104.1) (139.7) (54.0) 4.06 (104.1) JD-Frame, Three-Pole 0.34 R (8.7 R) 3.94 (100.0) 0.7 (18.) 0.50 (1.7) Diameter 3 Megger Holes if Required 1.56 (39.7) 0.78 (19.8).9 (74.) 0.88 (.) 3.33 (84.5) Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg) JD Frame Breaker Type Front View Cutout 0.19 R (4.8) R C L Handle C L Breaker.75 (69.9) 3.50 (88.9) 1.38 (34.9) 1.75 (44.5) (54.0) Front View 4.13 (104.8) ON OFF Side View 4.06 (103.) Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole JDB 11.5 (5.1) 1.50 (5.7) JD 11.5 (5.1) 1.50 (5.7) 13.5 (6.0) 9.00 (4.1) (4.5) (4.8).00 (0.9).00 (0.9).5 (1.0) HJD 11.5 (5.1) 1.50 (5.7) 13.5 (6.0) 9.00 (4.1) (4.5) (4.8).00 (0.9).00 (0.9).5 (1.0) JDC 1.5 (5.6) (6.1) 14.5 (6.5) (4.5) (5.0) (5.).00 (0.9).00 (0.9).5 (1.0) V4-T-160 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

46 .3 Typical K-Frame Circuit Breaker Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( s) F-Frame (10 5 s) J-Frame (70 50 s) K-Frame ( s) Selection Product Selection Accessories Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions and Weights L-Frame ( s) M-Frame ( s) N-Frame ( s) R-Frame ( s) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4)..... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-16 V4-T-164 V4-T-180 V4-T-181 V4-T-184 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-304 K-Frame ( s) Product Description All Eaton K-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated K-Frame circuit breakers are available as individual components (frame, trip unit, terminals), or factory assembled complete breakers K-Frame circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units are suitable for reverse feed use Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-161

47 .3 Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. K-Frame with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology Thermal-Magnetic Breakers and Frames 1 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1 Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type DK KD KDB HKD KDC Trip Unit Type KT = Thermal-magnetic of Poles = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole of Poles = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole KD F KT F 1 Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., KD3400F or HKD3400F. rating available with electronic trip unit only. Circuit Breaker/ Frame Circuit Breaker/ Frame C = Copper terminals E = 50% protected neutral pole (four-pole electronic trip unit circuit breaker only) F = Frame only (400 A only) K = High-magnetic molded-case switch V = 50 calibration (thermal-magnetic trip units only) W = Without terminals X = Load terminals only Y = Line side terminals only Blank = Standard load and line side terminals T = Trip unit only V4-T-16 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

48 .3 K-Frame with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology Circuit Breakers Performance at 480 Vac KDB = 35 kaic HKDB = 65 kaic CKDB = 35 kaic 100% rated CHKDB = 65 kaic 100% rated 310+ Electronic Trip Units 3 Trip Unit Type KES K-Frame with OPTIM Trip Unit Technology OPTIM Circuit Breakers of Poles 3 = Three-pole of Poles 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type KD HKD KDC CKD CHKD KDB F T36 ZG W Frame Designation F Trip Unit T33 = 310+ Electronic LS T3 = 310+ Electronic LSI T35 = 310+ Electronic LSG T36 = 310+ Electronic LSIG T38 = 310+ Electronic ALSI with Maintenance Mode T39 = 310+ Electronic ALSIG with Maintenance Mode of Poles 3 = Three-pole KES LSIG ZG 1 Cannot combine BX suffixes with BX suffixes. Not available in four-pole configurations. 3 Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., KD3400F, HKD3400F, etc. Feature Blank = No feature B0 = High load alarm B1 = Ground fault alarm, with trip B = Ground fault alarm, no trip ZG = Zone selective interlocking Trip Unit LS = 310+ Electronic LS LSI = 310+ Electronic LSI LSG= 310+ Electronic LSG LSIG= 310+ Electronic LSIG ALSI= 310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode ALSIG= 310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode Circuit Breaker/Frame KD 3 15 T5 7 W Trip Model T5 = Model 550 T10 = Model 1050 Trip Type = LSI 6 = LSIG 7 = LSIA Terminals W = No terminals L = Line and load Feature Blank = No feature B0 = High load alarm B1 = Ground fault alarm, with trip B = Ground fault alarm, no trip ZG = Zone selective interlocking W = Without terminals Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-163

49 .3 Product Selection Types KD, HKD and KDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Continuous at 40 C Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 1 High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 1 Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals 1 1 Magnetic trip adjustable 5 10 times continuous ampere rating. Individually packed. 3 TA400K, 3TA400K and 4TA400K terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Only 1 For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames Standard Terminals Only See Page V4-T-179 for Optional Terminals Two-Pole 100 KD100 HKD100 KDC100 KT100T TA300K 15 KD15 HKD15 KDC15 KT15T TA300K 150 KD150 HKD150 KDC150 KT150T TA300K 175 KD175 HKD175 KDC175 KT175T TA300K 00 KD00 HKD00 KDC00 KT00T TA300K 5 KD5 HKD5 KDC5 KT5T TA300K 50 KD50 HKD50 KDC50 KT50T TA350K 300 KD300 HKD300 KDC300 KT300T TA350K 350 KD350 HKD350 KDC350 KT350T TA350K 400 KD400 HKD400 KDC400 KT400T TA400K 3 Three-Pole 100 KD3100 HKD3100 KDC3100 KT3100T TA300K 15 KD315 HKD315 KDC315 KT315T TA300K 150 KD3150 HKD3150 KDC3150 KT3150T TA300K 175 KD3175 HKD3175 KDC3175 KT3175T TA300K 00 KD300 HKD300 KDC300 KT300T TA300K 5 KD35 HKD35 KDC35 KT35T TA300K 50 KD350 HKD350 KDC350 KT350T TA350K 300 KD3300 HKD3300 KDC3300 KT3300T TA350K 350 KD3350 HKD3350 KDC3350 KT3350T TA350K 400 KD3400 HKD3400 KDC3400 KT3400T 3TA400K 3 Four-Pole 100 KD4100 HKD4100 KDC4100 KT3100T TA300K 15 KD415 HKD415 KDC415 KT315T TA300K 175 KD4175 HKD4175 KDC4175 KT3175T TA300K 00 KD400 HKD400 KDC400 KT300T TA300K 5 KD45 HKD45 KDC45 KT35T TA300K 50 KD450 HKD450 KDC450 KT350T TA350K 300 KD4300 HKD4300 KDC4300 KT3300T TA350K 350 KD4350 HKD4350 KDC4350 KT3350T TA350K 400 KD4400 HKD4400 KDC4400 KT3400T 4TA400K 3 V4-T-164 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

50 .3 Types KD, HKD and KDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Frame Only Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-18. High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Two-Pole KD400F HKD400F KDC400F Three-Pole KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F Four-Pole KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F Max. Cont. at 40 C Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units Three-Pole Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1 Standard Options Ultra High Interrupting LS LSI LSG LSIG Standard High Capacity Adjustable Independently Interrupting Interrupting Current Short Time Adjustable Capacity Capacity Limiting Adjustable Independently Pickup with Short Time 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac Short Time Adjustable I t Short Pickup and Rated Rated Rated Pickup with Short Time Delay and Delay and 35 kaic at 65 kaic at 100 kaic I t Short Pickup and Ground Fault Ground Fault 480 Vac 480 Vac at 480 Vac Delay Ramp Delay Protection Protection 1 For AC use only. Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. 3 Included with LSG and LSIG trip units. 4 Trip unit includes protected neutral pole. Use corresponding three-pole trip unit if protected neutral pole is not required. 5 Fully rated neutral pole protection is standard. For 50% rated protection on neutral pole, add E to four-pole trip unit catalog number. Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 3 Terminal Information 15 KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F KES315LS KES315LSI KES315LSG KES315LSIG LGFCT15 See Page 50 KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F KES350LS KES350LSI KES350LSG KES350LSIG LGFCT50 V4-T KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F KES3400LS KES3400LSI KES3400LSG KES3400LSIG LGFCT400 Types KD, HKD and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units Four-Pole 45 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1 Standard Options Ultra High Interrupting LS LSI LSG LSIG Standard High Capacity Adjustable Independently Interrupting Interrupting Current Short Time Adjustable Capacity Capacity Limiting Adjustable Independently Pickup with Short Time 600 Vac 600 Vac 600 Vac Short Time Adjustable I t Short Pickup and Rated Rated Rated Pickup with Short Time Delay and Delay and 35 kaic at 65 kaic at 100 kaic I t Short Pickup and Ground Fault Ground Fault 480 Vac 480 Vac at 480 Vac Delay Ramp Delay Protection Protection Max. Cont. at 40 C Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 3 Terminal Information 15 KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES415LS KES415LSI See Page 50 KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES450LS KES450LSI V4-T KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES4400LS KES4400LSI Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-165

51 .3 Type KDB with Digitrip 310+ Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit Suitable for Reverse Feed See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-18. Continuous at 40 C of Poles Type HKDB with Digitrip 310+ Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit Suitable for Reverse Feed See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T % Rated Types CKD and CHKD Electronic Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at the 75 C ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. 100% Rated Types CKD and CHKD Electronic Circuit Breakers Three-Pole See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T For AC use only. Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. 3 Included with LSG and LSIG trip units. Factory Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals 1 Standard LS Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay Ramp Optional LSI LSG LSIG Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Ground Fault Protection Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 3 Terminal Information 15 3 KDB315FT33W KDB315FT3W KDB315FT35W KDB315FT36W LGFCT15 See Page 50 3 KDB350FT33W KDB350FT3W KDB350FT35W KDB350FT36W LGFCT50 V4-T KDB3400FT33W KDB3400FT3W KDB3400FT35W KDB3400FT36W LGFCT400 Continuous at 40 C of Poles Factory Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals 1 Standard LS Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay Ramp Optional LSI LSG LSIG Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Ground Fault Protection Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 3 Terminal Information 15 3 HKDB315FT33W HKDB315FT3W HKDB315FT35W HKDB315FT36W LGFCT15 See Page 50 3 HKDB350FT33W HKDB350FT3W HKDB350FT35W HKDB350FT36W LGFCT50 V4-T HKDB3400FT33W HKDB3400FT3W HKDB3400FT35W HKDB3400FT36W LGFCT400 Continuous at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only Standard Interrupting Capacity 35 kaic at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 65 kaic at 480 Vac Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only Standard Options Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay Ramp Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay and Ground Fault Protection Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 3 Terminal Information 15 CKD3400F CHKD3400F KES315LS KES315LSI KES315LSG KES315LSIG LGFCT15 See Page 50 CKD3400F CHKD3400F KES350LS KES350LSI KES350LSG KES350LSIG LGFCT50 V4-T CKD3400F CHKD3400F KES3400LS KES3400LSI KES3400LSG KES3400LSIG LGFCT400 V4-T-166 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

52 .3 Types DK and KDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Suitable for reverse feed application. Types DK and KDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 40 Vac Rated, 50 Vdc 600 Vac Rated, 50 Vdc Complete Circuit Breaker Complete Circuit Breaker Continuous Without Line and With Line With Standard Line and Without Line and Load Terminals Terminals Only Load Terminals Only Load Terminals at 40 C With Standard Line and Load Terminals Two-Pole 100 KDB100W KDB KDB15W KDB KDB150W KDB KDB175W KDB KDB00W KDB00 5 KDB5W KDB5 50 DK50W DK50Y DK50 KDB50W KDB DK300W DK300Y DK300 KDB300W KDB DK350W DK350Y DK350 KDB350W KDB DK400W DK400Y DK400 KDB400W KDB400 Three-Pole 100 KDB3100W KDB KDB315W KDB KDB3150W KDB KDB3175W KDB KDB300W KDB300 5 KDB35W KDB35 50 DK350W DK350Y DK350 KDB350W KDB DK3300W DK3300Y DK3300 KDB3300W KDB DK3350W DK3350Y DK3350 KDB3350W KDB DK3400W DK3400Y DK3400 KDB3400W KDB3400 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-167

53 .3 Molded Case Switches Eaton s molded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489. Molded Case Switches 40 Vac, 50 Vdc 600 Vac, 50 Vdc 600 Vac, 50 Vdc Continuous at 40 C Complete Circuit Breaker with Standard Line and Load Terminals Note Molded case switches may open above 4000 amperes. Complete Circuit Breaker with Standard Line and Load Terminals Two-Pole 400 DK400K KD400K KDB400K HKD400K HKDB400K Three-Pole 400 DK3400K KD3400K KDB3400K HKD3400K HKDB3400K Four-Pole 400 KD4400K KDB4400K HKD4400K HKDB4400K Complete Circuit Breaker with Standard Line and Load Terminals. Suitable for Reverse Feed Use V4-T-168 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

54 .3 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals. Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Circuit Breaker Frame Only Continuous at 40 C L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) ➀ S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Fixed Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac 15 KD315T5W KD315T56W KD315T57W 70 ORPK15A70 90 ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A15 50 KD350T5W KD350T56W KD350T57W 15 ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A00 5 ORPK05A5 50 ORPK05A KD3400T5W KD3400T56W KD3400T57W 00 ORPK40A00 5 ORPK40A5 50 ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A400 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-169

55 .3 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Continuous at 40 C L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. Fixed Plug Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 15 HKD315T5W HKD315T56W HKD315T57W 70 ORPK15A70 90 ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A15 50 HKD350T5W HKD350T56W HKD350T57W 15 ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A00 5 ORPK05A5 50 ORPK05A HKD3400T5W HKD3400T56W HKD3400T57W 00 ORPK40A00 5 ORPK40A5 50 ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A400 V4-T-170 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

56 .3 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Continuous at 40 C L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. Fixed Plug Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 15 KDC315T5W KDC315T56W KDC315T57W 70 ORPK15A70 90 ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A15 50 KDC350T5W KDC350T56W KDC350T57W 15 ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A00 5 ORPK05A5 50 ORPK05A KDC3400T5W KDC3400T56W KDC3400T57W 00 ORPK40A00 5 ORPK40A5 50 ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A400 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-171

57 .3 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals. Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Circuit Breaker Frame Only Continuous at 40 C 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Factory sealed. L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 1050 LSIG LSIA Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Fixed Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac 15 KD315T106W KD315T107W 70 ORPK15A70 90 ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A15 50 KD350T106W KD350T107W 15 ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A00 5 ORPK05A5 50 ORPK05A KD3400T106W KD3400T107W 00 ORPK40A00 5 ORPK40A 50 ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A400 V4-T-17 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

58 .3 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Continuous at 40 C L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 1050 LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Factory sealed. Fixed Plug Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 15 HKD315T106W HKD315T107W 70 ORPK15A70 90 ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A15 50 HKD350T106W HKD350T107W 15 ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A00 5 ORPK05A5 50 ORPK05A HKD3400T106W HKD3400T107W 00 ORPK40A00 5 ORPK40A5 50 ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A400 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-173

59 .3 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only Continuous at 40 C L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 1050 LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Factory sealed. Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Fixed Plug Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 15 KDC315T106W KDC315T107W 70 ORPK15A70 90 ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A15 50 KDC350T106W KDC350T107W 15 ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A00 5 ORPK05A5 50 ORPK05A KDC3400T106W KDC3400T107W 00 ORPK40A00 5 ORPK40A5 50 ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A400 V4-T-174 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

60 .3 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals. 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Circuit Breaker Frame Only Continuous at 40 C L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number (refer to Page V4-T-93). Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Fixed Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac 15 CKD315T5W CKD315T56W CKD315T57W 70 ORPK15A70 90 ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A15 50 CKD350T5W CKD350T56W CKD350T57W 15 ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A00 5 ORPK05A5 50 ORPK05A CKD3400T5W CKD3400T56W CKD3400T57W 00 ORPK40A00 5 ORPK40A5 50 ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A400 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-175

61 .3 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Continuous at 40 C L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. Fixed Plug Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 15 CHKD315T5W CHKD315T56W CHKD315T57W 70 ORPK15A70 90 ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A15 50 CHKD350T5W CHKD350T56W CHKD350T57W 15 ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A00 5 ORPK05A5 50 ORPK05A CHKD3400T5W CHKD3400T56W CHKD3400T57W 00 ORPK40A00 5 ORPK40A5 50 ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A400 V4-T-176 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

62 .3 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals. 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) Continuous at 40 C 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Factory sealed. OPTIM 1050 LSIG LSIA Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Fixed Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac 15 CKD315T106W CKD315T107W 70 ORPK15A70 90 ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A15 50 CKD350T106W CKD350T107W 15 ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A00 5 ORPK05A5 50 ORPK05A CKD3400T106W CKD3400T107W 00 ORPK40A00 5 ORPK40A5 50 ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A400 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-177

63 .3 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) Continuous at 40 C OPTIM 1050 LSIG 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Factory sealed. LSIA Fixed Plug Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 15 CHKD315T106W CHKD315T107W 70 ORPK15A70 90 ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A ORPK15A15 50 CHKD350T106W CHKD350T107W 15 ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A ORPK05A00 5 ORPK05A5 50 ORPK05A CHKD3400T106W CHKD3400T107W 00 ORPK40A00 5 ORPK40A5 50 ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A ORPK40A400 V4-T-178 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

64 .3 Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Guide Line and Load Terminals Eaton s line and load terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. All terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards Line and Load Terminals UL 486A and UL 486B and CSA Standard C. No. 65, or Electrical Bulletin Unless otherwise specified, K-Frame circuit breaker line and load terminals are shipped separately for field installation. 1 Individually packed. Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. 3 Two-pole kit. 4 Three-pole kit. 5 Four-pole kit. 6 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and three interphase barriers. Ordering Information K-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper or Cu/ AI terminals are required, order by catalog number. Specify if factory installation is required. TA401K TA400K, T400K TA350K, T350K TA300K, T300K T400KCW, TA400KCW, TA401KCW Breaker s Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire Range/No. Conductors Metric Wire Range mm Terminal TA40K, T40K Terminals with Control Wire Termination Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals 5 Aluminum Cu/AI (1) TA300K Aluminum Cu/AI (1) TA350K Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0 50 () TA400K 3 TA400KCW Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0 50 () TA400K 4 3TA400KCW Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0 50 () TA400K 56 4TA400KCW 56 Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals 5 Copper Cu (1) T300K Copper Cu (1) T350K Copper Cu 3/0 50 () T400K 3 T400KCW Aluminum Cu/AI /0 50 () or /0 500 (1) Tab is 1/4 x.03 3T400K 4 3T400KCW 4 4T400K 5 4T400KCW TA401K 3 TA401KCW TA401K 4 3TA401KCW TA401K 56 4TA401KCW Aluminum Cu/AI (1) TA40K 3 3TA40K 4 4TA40K Copper Cu (1) T40K 3 3T40K 4 4T40K 56 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-179

65 .3 Accessories Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. KD Frame Accessories Reference Two-Pole 1 Three-Pole Four-Pole Description Page Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-76 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-76 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T-78 Auxiliary switch (A, B) V4-T-78 Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B) V4-T-78 Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination V4-T-79 Shunt trip standard V4-T-8 Shunt trip low energy V4-T-85 Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T-90 PowerNet or zone interlock kit (OPTIM 550) V4-T-93 External Accessories End cap kit V4-T-308 Keeper nut V4-T-308 Control wire terminal kit V4-T-309 Terminal adapter V4-T-309 Multiwire connectors V4-T-310 Rear fed terminals V4-T-310 Base mounting hardware V4-T-311 Terminal shields V4-T-313 Interphase barriers V4-T-313 Non-padlockable handle block V4-T-314 Padlockable handle block V4-T-314 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T-315 Cylinder lock V4-T-315 Key Interlock kit V4-T-316 Sliding bar interlock requires two breakers V4-T-317 Walking beam interlock requires two breakers V4-T-317 Electrical (solenoid) operator V4-T-318 Plug-in adapters V4-T-319 Rear connecting studs V4-T-31 Panelboard connecting straps V4-T-3 Handle mechanisms V4-T-430 Handle extension V4-T-445 IQ Energy Sentinel V4-T-34 Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit V4-T-34 OPTIM System Components Three Poles Breaker interface module (BIM) V4-T-35 Digitrip OPTIMizer V4-T-35 Auxiliary power module V4-T-35 Legend Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole not both Accessory available/modification available 1 Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole. Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on KES or OPTIM trip units. Standard internal accessories cannot be mounted in right pole on any K-Frame OPTIM trip unites. Special OPTIM ground fault and zone interlock accessories are available for field installation in the right pole of K-Frame 550 OPTIM trip units. Factory installed a/b and bell/aux are available for factory installation. K-Frame breakers equipped with OPTIM 1050 trip units include aux-bell alarm in the right pole. V4-T-180 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

66 .3 KD Frame Accessories, continued Reference Two-Pole 1 Three-Pole Four-Pole Description Page Left Right Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special calibration Moisture fungus treatment V4-T-116 Freeze-tested circuit breakers Marine/naval application Legend Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole not both Accessory available/modification available 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories Description Electronic portable test kit MTST30V Trip unit tamper protection wire seal 5108A03H01 External neutral sensor, 400 A LGFCT400 3 External neutral sensor, 50 A LGFCT50 3 External neutral sensor, 15 A LGFCT15 3 Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication TRIP-LED Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW Remote-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEWR06 4 Technical Data and Specifications NEMA/UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity s Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical s) Circuit Breaker Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC Type of Poles DK, KDB, 3, KD, 3, HKD, HKDB, 3, KDC 7, 3, CKD CHKD IEC (P1) Interrupting Capacity s Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical s) Circuit Breaker Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC Type of Poles DK, KDB, 3, KD, 3, HKD, HKDB, 3, KDC, 3, Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole. MTST30V applies to Vac. 3 Included with all LD LSG and LSIG trip units and breakers. 4 Includes 6 ft cable for remote mounting; NEMA 3R rated. 5 Two-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of three-pole circuit breaker. 6 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds minimum at ka. 7 Current limiting. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-181

67 Specifications Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+ Breaker Type Frame K Frames available 15 A, 50 A, 400 A Continuous current range (A) A Ground fault pickup (A) A Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kaic) 35, 65, % rated Yes Protection Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Remote enabled on ALSI, ALSIG Interchangeable trip unit Yes High load alarm, trip (suffix B0) 1 Yes Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B1) 1 LSG, LSIG, ALSIG Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B) LSG, LSIG, ALSIG Zone selective interlock (suffix ZG) 1 LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG Cause of trip indication Yes (via TRIP-LED or DIGIVIEW) Thru-cover accessories No 310+ Adjustability Specifications K-Frame 310+ Settings 15A 50 A 400 A I r = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) (All 310+) Ir \ In A (=Ir) B (=Ir) C (=Ir) D (=Ir) E (=Ir) F (=Ir) G (=Ir) H (=Ir=In) t r = long delay time (seconds) (All 310+) I sd (x I r) = short delay pickup (amperes) Position 1 x x (All 310+) Position 3 3x 3x Position 3 4 4x 4x Position 4 5 5x 5x Position 5 6 6x 6x Position 6 7 7x 7x Position 7 8 8x 8x Position x 10x Position 9 1 1x 1x t sd = short delay time I t (milliseconds) Fixed (LS and LSG) t sd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst (LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG) Position 10 Position I g (x I n) = ground fault pickup (amperes) Position (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG) Position Position Position Position Position t g = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG) Position 10 Position Independently adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting Maintenance Mode pickup (.5 x I n ) (amperes) (310+ with Maintenance Mode ALSI and ALSIG) Fixed Bx suffixes cannot be combined with Bx suffixes. Not available for KD. Independently adjustable I i setting available in LG, NG and RG ALSI and ALSIG trip units. V4-T-18 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

68 .3 Specifications Trip Unit Type Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 rms sensing Yes Yes Breaker Type Frame K K range A A Interrupting rating at 480 volts 35, 65, 100 (ka) 35, 65, 100 (ka) Protection Ordering options LSI, LSI(A), LSIG LSI(A), LSIG Fixed rated plug (I n ) Yes Yes Overtemperature trip Yes Yes Long Delay Protection (L) Adjustable rating plug (I n ) No No Long delay pickup x (I n ) x (I n ) Long delay time I t 4 seconds 4 seconds Long delay time I 4 t 1 5 seconds 1 5 seconds Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes High load alarm x I r x I r Short Delay Protection (S) Short delay pickup % x (I r ) % x (I r ) Short delay time I t ms ms Short delay time flat ms ms Short delay time zone selective interlocking Yes 1 Yes Instantaneous Protection (I) Instantaneous pickup % x (I n ) % x (I n ) Discriminator Yes Yes Instantaneous override Yes Yes Ground Fault Protection (G) Ground fault alarm 0 100% x (I s ) 0 100% x (I s ) Ground fault pickup 0 100% x (I s ) 0 100% x (I s ) Ground fault delay I t ms ms Ground fault delay flat ms ms Ground fault zone selective interlocking Yes 1 Yes Ground fault thermal memory Yes Yes System Diagnostics Status LEDs Yes Yes Cause of trip LEDs Yes Yes Magnitude of trip information Yes Yes Remote signal contact ground alarm Yes 1 Yes Local auxiliary and bell alarm contact Optional Included System Monitoring Digital display Yes Yes Current Yes Yes Power and energy No Yes Power quality harmonics No Yes Power factor No Yes Communications PowerNet Yes 3 Yes Testing Testing method OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm I s = Sensor I n = Plug I r = Long Delay Pickup Setting 1 Zone interlock kit. By OPTIMizer/BIM. 3 Eaton s PowerNet kit. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-183

69 .3 Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) KD Frame of Poles Width Height Depth, (149.7) (57.3) 4.10 (104.1) 4 7. (183.4) (57.3) 4.10 (104.1) KD-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole 0.19 R (4.8 R) 0.34 R (8.7 R) Front Cover Cutout C L Handle 1.31 (33.3).63 (66.7) (60.7) (11.5) 3.75 (95.3) 0.83 (1.0) 1.64 (41.7) 1.5 (31.8) Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs (kg) KD Frame Front View 5.49 (139.4) Note 1 Weights shown are for thermal-magnetic trip units. Three-pole electronic trip units weigh.5 lbs (1.1 kg). ON OFF (57.) Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit 1 Breaker Type Two-Pole Three-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole DK 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.) KDB 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.) KD 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.) 7.5 (3.4) 8.5 (3.9) 1.5 (0.7) 1.5 (0.7) HKD, HKDB 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.) 7.5 (3.4) 8.5 (3.9) 1.5 (0.7) 1.5 (0.7) KDC 10.0 (4.5) 11.5 (5.) 7.5 (3.4) 8.5 (3.9) 1.5 (0.7) 1.5 (0.7) Side View 4.31 (109.6) V4-T-184 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

70 .3 Typical L-Frame Circuit Breaker Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( s) F-Frame (10 5 s) J-Frame (70 50 s) K-Frame ( s) L-Frame ( s) Selection Product Selection Accessories Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions and Weights M-Frame ( s) N-Frame ( s) R-Frame ( s) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4)..... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-186 V4-T-188 V4-T-04 V4-T-06 V4-T-10 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-304 L-Frame ( s) Product Description All Eaton L-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated L-Frame circuit breakers are available as individual components (frame, trip unit, terminals), or factory assembled complete breakers L-Frame circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units are suitable for reverse feed use Standards and Certifications CE marked Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-185

71 .3 Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. LD-Frame with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology Thermal-Magnetic Breakers and Frame 1 Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type LDB LD HLD LDC CLD CHLD CLDC Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1 Trip Unit Type LT = Thermal-magnetic of Poles = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole of Poles = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole LD F Circuit Breaker/ Frame LT T Trip Unit /Plug Note 1 Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., LD3600F, HLD3600F, etc. C = Copper terminals F = Frame only (600 A only) K = High magnetic molded case switch V = 50 C (thermal-magnetic trip units only) W = Without terminals X = Load side terminals only Y = Line side terminals only T = Trip unit thermal-magnetic fixed thermal adjustable magnetic V = 50 C calibration (thermal-magnetic trip units only) V4-T-186 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

72 .3 LD-Frame with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology 310+ Circuit Breakers Performance at 480 Vac LDB = 35 kaic HLDB = 65 kaic LDCB = 100 kaic CLDB = 35 kaic, 100% rated CHLDB = 65 kaic, 100% rated CLDCB = 100 kaic, 100% rated 310+ Electronic Trip Units Trip Unit Type LES of Poles 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole of Poles 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole s 600 Designation F s 600 LD-Frame with OPTIM Electronic Trip Unit Technology OPTIM Circuit Breakers Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type LD HLD LDC CLD CHLD CLDC of Poles 3 = Three-pole LDB F T36 BZG W 1 Not available in four-pole configurations. Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., LD3600F, HLD3600F, etc. Trip Unit T33 = 310+ Electronic LS T3 = 310+ Electronic LSI T35 = 310+ Electronic LSG 1 T36 = 310+ Electronic LSIG 1 T38 = 310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode T39 = 310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode 1 LES LSIG BZG Trip Unit LS = 310+ Electronic LS LSI = 310+ Electronic LSI LSG = 310+ Electronic LSG 1 LSIG = 310+ Electronic LSIG 1 ALSI = 310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode ALSIG = 310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode 1 LD 3 15 T5 7 W Circuit Breaker/ Frame 15 (Available on Model 1050 only) 50 (Available on Model 1050 only) Trip Type = LSI (550 only) 6 = LSIG 7 = LSIA Trip Model T5 = Model 550 T10 = Model 1050 Terminals W = No terminals Features Blank = No feature B0 = High load alarm B1 = Ground fault alarm, with trip 1 B = Ground fault alarm, no trip 1 ZG = Zone selective interlocking Features Blank = No feature B0 = High load alarm B1 = Ground fault alarm, with trip 1 B = Ground fault alarm, no trip 1 ZG = Zone selective interlocking W = Without terminals Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-187

73 .3 Product Selection Types LD, HLD and LDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Continuous at 40 C 1 Types LD, HLD and LDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Frame Only 1 Magnetic trip range 5 10 times continuous ampere rating. Individually packed. 3 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. 4 Neutral is in right pole. Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Factory Assembled Circuit Circuit Consisting of Frame, Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Trip Unit and Terminals Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Only For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames Standard Terminals Only See Page V4-T-03 for Optional Terminals Two-Pole 300 LD300 HLD300 LDC300 LT300T TA60LD 350 LD350 HLD350 LDC350 LT350T TA60LD 400 LD400 HLD400 LDC400 LT400T TA60LD 450 LD450 HLD450 LDC450 LT450T TA60LD 500 LD500 HLD500 LDC500 LT500T TA60LD 600 LD600 HLD600 LDC600 LT600T TA603LDK 3 Three-Pole 300 LD3300 HLD3300 LDC3300 LT3300T TA60LD 350 LD3350 HLD3350 LDC3350 LT3350T TA60LD 400 LD3400 HLD3400 LDC3400 LT3400T TA60LD 450 LD3450 HLD3450 LDC3450 LT3450T TA60LD 500 LD3500 HLD3500 LDC3500 LT3500T TA60LD 600 LD3600 HLD3600 LDC3600 LT3600T 3TA603LDK 3 Four-Pole LD4300 HLD4300 LDC4300 LT4300T TA60LD 350 LD4350 HLD4350 LDC4350 LT4350T TA60LD 400 LD4400 HLD4400 LDC4400 LT4400T TA60LD 450 LD4450 HLD4450 LDC4450 LT4450T TA60LD 500 LD4500 HLD4500 LDC4500 LT4500T TA60LD 600 LD4600 HLD4600 LDC4600 LT4600T 4TA603LDK 3 Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Two-Pole LD600F HLD600F LDC600F Three-Pole LD3600F HLD3600F LDC3600F Four-Pole LD4600F HLD4600F LDC4600F Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac V4-T-188 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

74 .3 Types LD, HLD and LDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-18. Types LD, HLD and LDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units Continuous at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1 Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac Types LDB, HLDB and LDCB Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable 310+ Electronic Trip Units Suitable for Reverse Feed See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-18. Circuit Breaker Frame Including Digitrip RMS 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Less Terminals Types LDB, HLDB and LDCB with Digitrip 310+ Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 100% Rated Types CLD, CHLD and CLDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at the 75 C ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T % Rated Types CLD, CHLD and CLDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with 310+ Interchangeable Trip Units 1 For AC use only. Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. 3 Included with LSG and LSIG trip units. 4 Neutral is in right pole. Standard LS Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay Ramp Optional LSI LSG LSIG Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Ground Fault Protection Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 3 Terminal Information Three-Pole 600 LD3600F HLD3600F LDC3600F LES3600LS LES3600LSI LES3600LSG LES3600LSIG LGFCT600 See Page V4-T-180 Four-Pole LD4600F HLD4600F LDC4600F LES4600LS LES4600LSI See Page V4-T-180 Continuous at 40 C of Poles Factory Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals 1 Standard LS Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay Ramp Optional LSI LSG LSIG Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Ground Fault Protection Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 3 Terminal Information LDB3600FT33W LDB3600FT3W LDB3600FT35W LDB3600FT36W LGFCT600 See Page HLDB3600FT33W HLDB3600FT3W HLDB3600FT35W HLDB3600FT36W V4-T LDCB3600FT33W LDCB3600FT3W LDCB3600FT35W LDCB3600FT36W Continuous at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only Standard LS Adjustable Short Independently Time Pickup with Adjustable Short I t Short Delay Time Pickup and Ramp Delay Optional LSI LSG LSIG Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Ground Fault Protection Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 3 Terminal Information Three-Pole 600 CLD3600F CHLD3600F CLDC3600F LES3600LS LES3600LSI LES3600LSG LES3600LSIG LGFCT600 See Page V4-T-180 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-189

75 .3 Type LDB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units 1 Continuous 600 Vac Rated, 50 Vdc Complete Circuit Breaker Without Line and Load Terminals Two-Pole 300 LDB300W LDB LDB350W LDB LDB400W LDB LDB450W LDB LDB500W LDB LDB600W LDB600 Three-Pole 300 LDB3300W LDB LDB3350W LDB LDB3400W LDB LDB3450W LDB LDB3500W LDB LDB3600W LDB3600 With Standard Line and Load Terminals Only Molded Case Switches Eaton s molded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker Continuous at 40 C 1 Factory sealed suitable for reverse feed application. Molded case switch will trip above 6000 amperes. components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489. Molded Case Switches 600 Vac, 50 Vdc Standard Terminals Only Circuit Breaker Only without Line and Load Terminals See Page V4-T-03 for Optional Terminals Two-Pole 600 LD600WK TA603LDK 600 LDB600WK 1 TA603LDK 600 HLD600WK TA603LDK Three-Pole 600 LD3600WK 3TA603LDK 600 LDB3600WK 1 3TA603LDK 600 HLD3600WK 3TA603LDK Four-Pole 600 LD4600WK 4TA603LDK 600 LDB4600WK 1 4TA603LDK 600 HLD4600WK 4TA603LDK V4-T-190 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

76 .3 Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Plug Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Plug, Terminals. Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Plug Circuit Breaker Frame Only Continuous at 40 C L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Fixed Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac 15 LD315T5W LD315T56W LD315T57W ORPL15A070 ORPL15A090 ORPL15A100 ORPL15A110 ORPL15A15 50 LD350T5W LD350T56W LD350T57W ORPL05A15 ORPL05A150 ORPL05A175 ORPL05A00 ORPL05A5 ORPL05A LD3400T5W LD3400T56W LD3400T57W 00 ORPL40A00 5 ORPL40A5 50 ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A LD3600T5W LD3600T56W LD3600T57W 300 ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A600 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-191

77 .3 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Continuous at 40 C L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. Fixed Plug Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 15 HLD315T5W HLD315T56W HLD315T57W 70 ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A15 50 HLD350T5W HLD350T56W HLD350T57W 15 ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A00 5 ORPL05A5 50 ORPL05A HLD3400T5W HLD3400T56W HLD3400T57W 00 ORPL40A00 5 ORPL40A5 50 ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A HLD3600T5W HLD3600T56W HLD3600T57W 300 ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A600 V4-T-19 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

78 .3 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) Continuous at 40 C OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. Fixed Plug Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 15 LDC315T5W LDC315T56W LDC315T57W ORPL15A070 ORPL15A090 ORPL15A100 ORPL15A110 ORPL15A15 50 LDC350T5W LDC350T56W LDC350T57W ORPL05A15 ORPL05A150 ORPL05A175 ORPL05A00 ORPL05A5 ORPL05A LDC3400T5W LDC3400T56W LDC3400T57W 00 ORPL40A00 5 ORPL40A5 50 ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A LDC3600T5W LDC3600T56W LDC3600T57W 300 ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A600 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-193

79 .3 Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Plug Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Plug, Terminals. Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Plug Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) Continuous at 40 C OPTIM LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. Fixed Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac 15 LD315T106W LD315T107W 70 ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A15 50 LD350T106W LD350T107W 15 ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A00 5 ORPL05A5 50 ORPL05A LD3400T106W LD3400T107W 00 ORPL40A00 5 ORPL40A5 50 ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A LD3600T106W LD3600T107W 300 ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A600 V4-T-194 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

80 .3 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) Continuous at 40 C OPTIM LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. Fixed Plug Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 15 HLD315T106W HLD315T107W 70 ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A15 50 HLD350T106W HLD350T107W 15 ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A00 5 ORPL05A5 50 ORPL05A HLD3400T106W HLD3400T107W 00 ORPL40A00 5 ORPL40A5 50 ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A HLD3600T106W HLD3600T107W 300 ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A600 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-195

81 .3 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) Continuous at 40 C OPTIM LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. Fixed Plug Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 15 LDC315T106W LDC315T107W 70 ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A15 50 LDC350T106W LDC350T107W 15 ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A00 5 ORPL05A5 50 ORPL05A LDC3400T106W LDC3400T107W 00 ORPL40A00 5 ORPL40A5 50 ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A LDC3600T106W LDC3600T107W 300 ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A600 V4-T-196 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

82 .3 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Plug, Terminals. 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) Continuous at 40 C OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Fixed Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac 15 CLD315T5W CLD315T56W CLD315T57W 70 ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A15 50 CLD350T5W CLD350T56W CLD350T57W 15 ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A00 5 ORPL05A5 50 ORPL05A CLD3400T5W CLD3400T56W CLD3400T57W 00 ORPL40A00 5 ORPL40A5 50 ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A CLD3600T5W CLD3600T56W CLD3600T57W 300 ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A600 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-197

83 .3 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) Continuous at 40 C OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. Fixed Plug Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 15 CHLD315T5W CHLD315T56W CHLD315T57W 70 ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A15 15 ORPL15A15 50 CHLD350T5W CHLD350T56W CHLD350T57W 15 ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A00 5 ORPL05A5 50 ORPL05A CHLD3400T5W CHLD3400T56W CHLD3400T57W 00 ORPL40A00 5 ORPL40A5 50 ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A CHLD3600T5W CHLD3600T56W CHLD3600T57W 300 ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A600 V4-T-198 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

84 .3 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) Continuous at 40 C OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. Fixed Plug Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 15 CLDC315T5W CLDC315T56W CLDC315T57W 70 ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A15 50 CLDC350T5W CLDC350T56W CLDC350T57W 15 ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A00 5 ORPL05A5 50 ORPL05A CLDC3400T5W CLDC3400T56W CLDC3400T57W 00 ORPL40A00 5 ORPL40A5 50 ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A CLDC3600T5W CLDC3600T56W CLDC3600T57W 300 ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A600 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-199

85 .3 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) Continuous at 40 C OPTIM LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Fixed Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 35 kaic at 480 Vac 15 CLD315T106W CLD315T107W 70 ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A15 50 CLD350T106W CLD350T107W 15 ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A00 5 ORPL05A5 50 ORPL05A CLD3400T106W CLD3400T107W 00 ORPL40A00 5 ORPL40A5 50 ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A CLD3600T106W CLD3600T107W 300 ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A600 V4-T-00 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

86 .3 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plug, continued Continuous at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Fixed Plug Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 15 CHLD315T106W CHLD315T107W 70 ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A15 50 CHLD350T106W CHLD350T107W 15 ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A00 5 ORPL05A5 50 ORPL05A CHLD3400T106W CHLD3400T107W 00 ORPL40A00 5 ORPL40A5 50 ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A CHLD3600T106W CHLD3600T107W 300 ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A600 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-01

87 .3 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Plug, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I t or Flat Response) Continuous at 40 C OPTIM LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. Fixed Plug Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 15 CLDC315T106W CLDC315T107W 70 ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A ORPL15A15 50 CLDC350T106W CLDC350T107W 15 ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A ORPL05A00 5 ORPL05A5 50 ORPL05A CLDC3400T106W CLDC3400T107W 00 ORPL40A00 5 ORPL40A5 50 ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A ORPL40A CLDC3600T106W CLDC3600T107W 300 ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A ORPL60A600 V4-T-0 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

88 .3 Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information Line and Load Terminals Eaton s line and load terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. All terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards UL 486A and UL 486B and CSA Standard C. No. 65M. Unless otherwise specified, Terminals TA401LD or TA603LD Terminal (Step-Type Terminal Requires Terminal Cover and Warning Label. See Inset.) Line and Load Terminals Breaker s L-Frame circuit breaker line and load terminals are shipped separately for field installation. The wire connecting terminal is secured with two panhead, slotted screws and lockwashers that can be checked for the correct torque loading or retightened from the front of the circuit 1 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. Individually packed. Terminal Body Material Wire Type Pan-Head Screws and Lockwashers AWG Wire Range/ of Conductors TA450LD or TA60LD or T60LD Terminal Circuit Breaker Line Terminal Cover Metric Wire Range mm breaker before installation of the conductors. (Applies to all styles.) The circuit breaker line/load terminal conductors are positioned in the conducting holes in the wire connecting terminal and are secured with recessed socket screws that are tightened to the correct torque loading from the front of the circuit breaker. Pan-Head Screws and Lockwashers (Installed before Cable Clamping Screws) Terminal Poles Ordering Information L-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper terminals are required, order by catalog. Specify if factory installation is required. Terminal Cover Warning Label Retainer Terminals with Control Wire Termination Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals 400 Aluminum Cu/AI 4/0 600 (1) Two-pole kit 1 TA401LDK 400 Aluminum Cu/AI 4/0 600 (1) Three-pole kit 1 3TA401LDK 400 Aluminum Cu/AI 4/0 600 (1) Four-pole kit 1 4TA401LDK 450 Aluminum Cu/AI 4 4/0 () 5 95 TA450LD 500 Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0 350 () TA60LD TA60LDCW 600 Aluminum Cu/AI () Two-pole kit 1 TA603LDK TA603LDKCW 600 Aluminum Cu/AI () Three-pole kit 1 3TA603LDK 3TA603LDKCW 600 Aluminum Cu/AI () Four-pole kit 1 4TA603LDK 4TA603LDKCW Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals 600 Copper Cu () T60LD T60LDCW Screws Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-03

89 .3 Accessories Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. LD Frame Accessories Reference Two-Pole 1, Three-Pole Four-Pole Description Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) 3 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-76 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-76 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T-78 Auxiliary switch (A, B) V4-T-78 Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B) V4-T-78 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) and alarm switch combination V4-T-80 Auxiliary switch (A, B) and alarm switch combination V4-T-80 Shunt trip standard 4 V4-T-8 Shunt trip low energy 4 V4-T-85 Undervoltage release mechanism 4 V4-T-91 Eaton PowerNet communications kit (OPTIM 550) V4-T-93 External Accessories End cap kit V4-T-308 Control wire terminal kit V4-T-309 Base mounting hardware V4-T-311 Terminal shields V4-T-313 Interphase barriers V4-T-313 Non-padlockable handle block V4-T-314 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T-315 Key interlock kit V4-T-316 Sliding bar interlock requires two breakers V4-T-317 Walking beam interlock requires two breakers V4-T-317 Electrical (motor) operator V4-T-318 Plug-in adapters V4-T-30 Rear connecting studs V4-T-31 Panelboard connecting straps V4-T-3 Handle mechanisms V4-T-430 Handle extension V4-T-445 Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit V4-T-34 Legend Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole not both Accessory available/modification available 1 Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole. Refer to Eaton for appropriate neutral pole accessory combinations. 3 OPTIM model 1050 is factory sealed and does not have the right pole space available for accessories. 4 Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on LES or OPTIM trip units. Standard non-tripping internal accessories can be mounted in the left or right poles of LES and 550 OPTIM trip units. V4-T-04 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

90 .3 LD Frame Accessories, continued Description Legend Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole not both Accessory available/modification available Reference Page 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Accessories Description Electronic portable test kit MTST30V 3 Trip unit tamper protection wire seal 5108A03H01 External neutral sensor LGFCT600 4 Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication TRIP-LED Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW Remote-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEWR Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole. Refer to Eaton for appropriate neutral pole accessory combinations. 3 MTST30V applies to Vac. 4 Included with all LD LSG and LSIG trip units and breakers. 5 Includes 6 ft cable for remote mounting; NEMA 3R rated. Two-Pole 1, Three-Pole Four-Pole Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral OPTIM System Components Three Poles Ground fault alarm unit V4-T-34 Potential transformer module V4-T-34 Breaker interface module (BIM) V4-T-35 Digitrip OPTIMizer V4-T-35 Auxiliary power module V4-T-35 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special calibration Moisture fungus treatment V4-T-116 Freeze-tested circuit breakers Marine/naval application Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-05

91 .3 Technical Data and Specifications UL 489 Interrupting Capacity s 1 Circuit Breaker Type of Poles Interrupting Capacity (ka rms Symmetrical s) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC LDB, LD, 3, CLD 4, 3, HLD, HLDB, 3, CHLD 4, 3, LDC, LDCB 5, 3, CLDC 45, 3, IEC 947- Interrupting Capacity s 1 Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical s) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC Circuit Breaker Type of Poles I cu I cs I cu I cs I cu I cs I cu I cs LDB, LD, 3, CLD 4, 3, HLD, HLDB, 3, CHLD 4, 3, LDC, LDCB, 3, CLDC 4, 3, Utilization Category A circuit breakers. L/R = 8 milliseconds minimum. 3 Two-pole circuit breaker or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Incorporating thermal-magnetic trip unit only % rated breakers. 5 Current limiting. V4-T-06 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

92 Specifications 310+ Adjustability Specifications Description Specification LD Frame Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+ Description Specification Breaker Type 310+ settings 600 A I Frame designation LD r = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) I r (All 310+) A 50 Frames available 600 A Continuous current range (A) A B 300 Ground fault pickup (A) A C 315 Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kaic) 35, 65, 100 D % rated Yes E 400 Protection F 450 Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG G 500 Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Remote enabled on ALSI, ALSIG H (= I n ) 600 (or Maintenance Mode) t r = long delay time (seconds) Interchangeable trip unit Yes (All 310+) 4 4 High load alarm (suffix B0) 1 Yes 7 7 Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B1) 1 LSG, LSIG, ALSIG Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B) 1 LSG, LSIG, ALSIG 1 1 Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG Cause of trip indication Yes (via TRIP-LED or DIGIVIEW) 0 0 Thru-cover accessories No 4 4 I sd (x I r ) = short delay pickup Position 1 x (All 310+) Position 3x Position 3 4x Position 4 5x Position 5 6x Position 6 7x Position 7 8x Position 8 8x Position 9 8x t sd = short delay time I t (milliseconds) Fixed (LS and LSG) t sd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst (LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG) Position 10 Position I g (x I n ) = ground fault pickup (amperes) Position 1 10 (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG) Position 180 Position 3 40 Position Position Position t g = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG) Position 10 Position Independently adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting Maintenance Mode pickup (.5 x I n ) (amperes) (310+ with Maintenance Mode ALSI and ALSIG) Fixed Bx suffixes cannot be combined with Bx suffixes. Not available for LD. Independently adjustable Ii setting available in LG, NG, and RG ALSI and ALSIG trip units. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-07

93 .3 Digitrip OPTIM Specifications Trip Unit Type Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 rms sensing Yes Yes Breaker Type Frame L L range A A Interrupting rating at 480 volts 35, 65, 100 (ka) 35, 65, 100 (ka) Protection Ordering options LSI, LSI(A), LSIG LSI(A), LSIG Fixed rated plug (I n ) Yes Yes Overtemperature trip Yes Yes Long Delay Protection (L) Adjustable rating plug (I n ) No No Long delay pickup x (I n ) x (I n ) Long delay time I t 4 seconds 4 seconds Long delay time I 4 t 1 5 seconds 1 5 seconds Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes High load alarm x I r x I r Short Delay Protection (S) Short delay pickup % x (I r ) % x (I r ) Short delay time I t ms ms Short delay time flat ms ms Short delay time zone selective interlocking Yes 1 Yes Instantaneous Protection (I) Instantaneous pickup % x (I n ) % x (I n ) Discriminator Yes Yes Instantaneous override Yes Yes Ground Fault Protection (G) Ground fault alarm 0 100% x (I s ) 0 100% x (I s ) Ground fault pickup 0 100% x (I s ) 0 100% x (I s ) Ground fault delay I t ms ms Ground fault delay flat ms ms Ground fault zone selective interlocking Yes 1 Yes Ground fault thermal memory Yes Yes Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm I s = Sensor I n = Plug I r = Long Delay Pickup Setting Note 1 Zone interlock kit. V4-T-08 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

94 .3 Digitrip OPTIM Specifications, continued Trip Unit Type Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 System Diagnostics Status LEDs Yes Yes Cause of trip LEDs Yes Yes Magnitude of trip information Yes Yes Remote signal contact ground alarm Yes 1 Yes Local auxiliary and bell alarm contact Optional Included System Monitoring Digital display Yes Yes Current Yes Yes Power and energy No Yes Power quality harmonics No Yes Power factor No Yes Communications PowerNet Yes 3 Yes Testing Testing method OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm I s = Sensor I n = Plug I r = Long Delay Pickup Setting 1 Zone interlock kit. By OPTIMizer/BIM. 3 Eaton s PowerNet kit. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-09

95 .3 Dimensions and Weights Dimensions in Inches (mm) LD Frame of Poles Width Height Depth, (09.6) (73.1) 4.06 (103.1) (79.4) (73.1) 4.06 (103.1) LD-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole CL Handle Front Cover Cutout 3.44 (87.3) 1.7 (43.7) 3.64 (9.5) Breaker CL 0.5 (6.4) R 7.8 (184.9) 3.8 (83.3) 1.33 (33.7).9 (58.) 1.50 (38.1) 0.19 R (4.8) R Front View 8.5 (09.6) (73.1) Side View Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs (kg) LD Frame Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Breaker Type Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 3.81 (96.8) 8.1 (08.6) LD, HLD, LDC 18 (8.) 0 (9.1) 5 (11.3) 14 (6.4) 15 (6.8) 0 (9.1) 3 (1.4) 4 (1.8) 5 (.3) LDB 18 (8.) 0 (9.1) 5 (11.3) V4-T-10 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

96 .3 Typical M-Frame Circuit Breaker Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( s) F-Frame (10 5 s) J-Frame (70 50 s) K-Frame ( s) L-Frame ( s) M-Frame ( s) Selection Product Selection Accessories Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions and Weights Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) N-Frame ( s) R-Frame ( s) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4)..... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-1 V4-T-13 V4-T-18 V4-T-19 V4-T-1 V4-T-56 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-304 M-Frame ( s) Product Description All Eaton M-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated MDL-Frame circuit breakers are available as individual components (frame, trip unit, terminals), or factory assembled complete breakers MDLB, HMDLB-Frame circuit breakers with noninterchangeable trip units are suitable for reverse feed use Standards and Certifications CE marked Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-11

97 .3 Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. MDL Frame with Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Technology Thermal-Magnetic Breakers and Frame 1 Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit 1 MDL Frame with 310+ Electronic Trip Unit Technology 310+ Circuit Breaker 310+ Electronic Trip Unit 1 Note Performance at 480 Vac MDLB = 50 kaic HMDLB = 65 kaic CMDLB = 50 kaic, 100% rated CHMDLB = 65 kaic, 100% rated Trip Unit Type MES Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type MDL, MDLB HMDL, HMDLB Trip Unit Type MT of Poles 3 = Three-pole of Poles = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole of Poles = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole s 800 Designation F of Poles 3 = Three-pole s 800 MDL F Circuit Breaker/ Frame Frames are the same for thermal-magnetic or 310+ electronic trip units, e.g., MDL3800F, HMDL3800F, etc MT T Trip Unit / Plug F = Frame only (800 A only) K = High magnetic molded case switch V = 50 C (thermal-magnetic trip units only) W = Without terminals X = Load side terminals only Y = Line side terminals only T V MDLB F T36 B1 W Trip Unit T33 = 310+ Electronic LS T3 = 310+ Electronic LSI T35 = 310+ Electronic LSG T36 = 310+ Electronic LSIG T38 = 310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode T39 = 310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode MES ALSIG B1 Trip Unit LS = 310+ Electronic LS LSI = 310+ Electronic LSI LSG = 310+ Electronic LSG LSIG = 310+ Electronic LSIG ALSI = 310+ Electronic LSI with Maintenance Mode ALSIG = 310+ Electronic LSIG with Maintenance Mode = Thermal-magnetic = 50 C (thermal-magnetic trip units only) Terminals W = No terminals Features Blank = No feature B0 = High load alarm B1 = Ground fault alarm, with trip B = Ground fault alarm, no trip ZG = Zone selective interlocking Features Blank = No feature B0 = High load alarm B1 = Ground fault alarm, with trip B = Ground fault alarm, no trip ZG = Zone selective interlocking V4-T-1 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

98 .3 Product Selection Types MDL and HMDL Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Two-Pole Continuous at 40 C Types MDL and HMDL Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Three-Pole Note 1 Two terminals are required per pole. Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Frame Only High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Frame Only Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Only For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames Magnetic Trip Range is 5 10 Up Through 600 A; 4 8 on 700 and 800 A x Continuous Standard Terminals Only 1 See Page V4-T-17 for Optional Terminals 300 MDL300 MDL800F HMDL300 HMDL800F MT300T TA700MA1 350 MDL350 HMDL350 MT350T TA700MA1 400 MDL400 HMDL400 MT400T TA700MA1 450 MDL450 HMDL450 MT450T TA700MA1 500 MDL500 HMDL500 MT500T TA700MA1 600 MDL600 HMDL600 MT600T TA700MA1 700 MDL700 HMDL700 MT700T TA700MA1 800 MDL800 HMDL800 MT800T TA800MA Continuous at 40 C Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Frame Only High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Frame Only Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Only For Use with Standard or High or Ultra High Interrupting Frames Magnetic Trip Range is 5 10 Up Through 600 A; 4 8 on 700 and 800 A x Continuous Standard Terminals Only 1 See Page V4-T-17 for Optional Terminals 300 MDL3300 MDL3800F HMDL3300 HMDL3800F MT3300T TA700MA1 350 MDL3350 HMDL3350 MT3400T TA700MA1 400 MDL3400 HMDL3400 MT3400T TA700MA1 450 MDL3450 HMDL3450 MT3450T TA700MA1 500 MDL3500 HMDL3500 MT3500T TA700MA1 600 MDL3600 HMDL3600 MT3600T TA700MA1 700 MDL3700 HMDL3700 MT3700T TA700MA1 800 MDL3800 HMDL3800 MT3800T TA800MA Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-13

99 .3 Types MDLB and HMDLB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Two-Pole 1 Continuous at 40 C Types MDLB and HMDLB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units Three-Pole 1 1 Factory sealed for reverse feed application. Two terminals are required per pole. Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Standard Terminals Only See Page V4-T-17 for Optional Terminals 300 MDLB300 HMDLB300 TA700MA1 350 MDLB350 HMDLB350 TA700MA1 400 MDLB400 HMDLB400 TA700MA1 450 MDLB450 HMDLB450 TA700MA1 500 MDLB500 HMDLB500 TA700MA1 600 MDLB600 HMDLB600 TA700MA1 700 MDLB700 HMDLB700 TA700MA1 800 MDLB800 HMDLB800 TA800MA Continuous at 40 C Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Factory Assembled Circuit Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit and Terminals Standard Terminals Only See Page V4-T-17 for Optional Terminals 300 MDLB3300 HMDLB3300 TA700MA1 350 MDLB3350 HMDLB3350 TA700MA1 400 MDLB3400 HMDLB3400 TA700MA1 450 MDLB3450 HMDLB3450 TA700MA1 500 MDLB3500 HMDLB3500 TA700MA1 600 MDLB3600 HMDLB3600 TA700MA1 700 MDLB3700 HMDLB3700 TA700MA1 800 MDLB3800 HMDLB3800 TA800MA V4-T-14 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

100 .3 Types MDL and HMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units Order as Individual Components: breaker frame, trip unit and terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T-0. Types MDL and HMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units Three-Pole Continuous at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1 Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kaic at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Standard LS Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay Ramp Types MDLB and HMDLB Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units 4 100% Rated Types CMDL and CHMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at the 75 C ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit and terminals. See 310+ adjustability specifications on Page V4-T % Rated Types CMDL and CHMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable 310+ Trip Units Three-Pole 1 For AC use only. Required for four-wire systems if neutral protection is desired. 3 Included with LSG and LSIG trip units or breakers. 4 Factory sealed, suitable for reverse feed application. CMDLB and CHMDLB are also available. Optional LSI LSG LSIG Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Ground Fault Protection Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 3 Terminal Information 800 MDL3800F HMDL3800F MES3800LS MES3800LSI MES3800LSG MES3800LSIG LGFCT600 See Page V4-T-18 Continuous at 40 C Factory-Assembled Circuit Breaker Consisting of Frame and Trip Unit Less Terminals LS LSI LSG LSIG Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay Ramp Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Delay Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Ground Fault Protection Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 3 Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kaic at 480 Vac 800 MDLB3800FT33W MDLB3800FT3W MDLB3800FT35W MDLB3800FT36W LGFCT600 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 800 HMDLB3800FT33W HMDLB3800FT3W HMDLB3800FT35W HMDLB3800FT36W LGFCT600 Continuous at 40 C Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310+ Trip Unit Only 1 Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kaic at 480 Vac High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac Standard LS Independently Adjustable Short Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Time Pickup and Short Delay Ramp Delay Options LSI LSG LSIG Adjustable Short Time Pickup with I t Short Delay and Ground Fault Protection Independently Adjustable Short Time Pickup and Ground Fault Protection Neutral CT for LSG and LSIG 3 Terminal Information 800 CMDL3800F CHMDL3800F MES3800LS MES3800LSI MES3800LSG MES3800LSIG LGFCT600 See Page V4-T-18 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-15

101 .3 Molded Case Switches Eaton s molded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Molded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker 1 MDLB and HMDLB are suitable for reverse feed applications. Molded case switch may trip above 6000 amperes. components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Molded case switches are listed in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489. Molded Case Switches 600 Vac, 50 Vdc Circuit Breaker Only without Continuous Line and Load Terminals at 40 C Two-Pole 800 MDL800WK MDLB800WK 1 HMDL800WK Three-Pole 800 MDL3800WK MDLB3800WK 1 HMDL3800WK V4-T-16 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

102 .3 Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information Line and Load Terminals M-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper or Cu/ AI terminals are required, order by catalog number. Specify if factory installation is required. TA700MA1 TA800MA TA801MA Line and Load Terminals Breaker s Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire Range/No. Conductors Terminal Terminals with Control Wire Termination Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals 700 Aluminum Cu/AI kcmil () TA700MA1 TA700MA1CWT 800 std. Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0 400 kcmil (3) TA800MA TA800MACWT 800 Aluminum Cu/AI kcmil () TA801MA TA801MACWT Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals 600 Copper Cu /0 500 kcmil () T600MA1 800 Copper Cu 3/0 300 kcmil (3) T800MA1 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-17

103 .3 Accessories Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. MD Frame Accessories Description Reference Page Legend Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole not both Accessory available/modification available 1 Two-pole breaker supplied in three-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from center pole. Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on MES trip units. Two-Pole 1 Three-Pole Left Right Left Center Right Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-76 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-76 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T-78 Auxiliary switch (A, B) V4-T-78 Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B) V4-T-78 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) and alarm switch combination V4-T-80 Auxiliary switch (A, B) and alarm switch combination V4-T-80 Shunt trip standard V4-T-83 Shunt trip low energy V4-T-85 Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T-91 External Accessories Rear fed terminals V4-T-310 Base mounting hardware V4-T-311 Terminal shields V4-T-313 Interphase barriers V4-T-313 Non-padlockable handle block V4-T-314 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T-315 Key interlock kit V4-T-316 Sliding bar interlock requires two breakers V4-T-317 Walking beam interlock requires two breakers V4-T-317 Electrical (motor) operator V4-T-318 Plug-in adapters V4-T-30 Rear connecting studs V4-T-31 Panelboard connecting straps V4-T-3 Handle mechanisms V4-T-430 Handle extension V4-T-445 Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit V4-T-34 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special calibration Moisture fungus treatment V4-T-116 Freeze-tested circuit breakers Marine/naval application V4-T-18 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

104 Electronic Trip Unit Accessories Description Technical Data and Specifications UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity s 4 IEC 947- Interrupting Capacity s 4 Electronic portable test kit MTST30V 1 Trip unit tamper protection wire seal 5108A03H01 External neutral sensor LGFCT600 Breaker-mount cause-of-trip indication TRIP-LED Breaker-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEW Remote-mount ammeter module DIGIVIEWR06 3 Circuit Breaker Type of Poles Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical s) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC MDL, MDLB, CMDL, HMDL, HMDLB, CHMDL, Circuit Breaker Type of Poles Interrupting Capacity rms (ka Symmetrical s) I CU I CS Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC MDL, MDLB, 3 65/65 50/50 0/10 0/10 CMDL, 3 65/65 50/50 0/10 HMDL, HMDLB, 3 100/100 70/50 5/13 0/10 CHMDL, 3 100/100 70/50 5/13 1 MTST30V applies to Vac. Included with all LD LSG and LSIG trip units and breakers. 3 Includes 6 ft cable for remote mounting; NEMA 3R rated. 4 Utilization Category A circuit breakers. 5 Two-pole or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker. Thermal-magnetic trip units only, MDL, HMDL breakers with electronic trip unit are not DC rated. 6 Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 ka and 8 milliseconds at ka. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-19

105 Specifications 310+ Adjustability Specifications Description Specification MDL Frame Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310+ Description Specification Breaker Type 310+ settings 800 A I Frame designation MDL r = continuous current or long delay pickup (amperes) I r (All 310+) A 30 Frames available 800 A Continuous current range (A) A B 400 Ground fault pickup (A) A C 450 Interrupting capacities at 480 Vac (kaic) 50, 65 D % rated Yes E 600 Protection F 630 Ordering options LS, LSI, LSG, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG G 700 Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Remote enabled on ALSI, ALSIG H (= I n ) 800 (or Maintenance Mode) t r = long delay time (seconds) Interchangeable trip unit Yes (All 310+) 4 4 High load alarm (suffix B0) 1 Yes 7 7 Ground fault alarm with trip (suffix B1) 1 LSG, LSIG, ALSIG Ground fault alarm, no trip (suffix B) 1 LSG, LSIG, ALSIG 1 1 Zone selective interlocking (suffix ZG) LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG Cause of trip indication Yes (via TRIP-LED or DIGIVIEW) 0 0 Thru-cover accessories No 4 4 I sd (x I r ) = short delay pickup Position 1 x (All 310+) Position 3x Position 3 4x Position 4 5x Position 5 6x Position 6 7x Position 7 8x Position 8 8x Position 9 8x t sd = short delay time I t (milliseconds) Fixed (LS and LSG) t sd = short delay time flat (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst (LSI, LSIG, ALSI, ALSIG) Position 10 Position I g (x I n ) = ground fault pickup (amperes) Position (310+ w/ ground fault) Position 40 Position 3 30 Position Position Position t g = ground fault delay time (milliseconds) Position 1 Inst (LSG, LSIG, ALSIG) Position 10 Position Independently adjustable Instantaneous (Ii) setting Maintenance Mode pickup (.5 x I n ) (amperes) (310+ with Maintenance Mode ALSI and ALSIG) Fixed Bx suffixes cannot be combined with Bx suffixes. Not available for MDL. Independently adjustable Ii setting available in LG, NG, and RG ALSI and ALSIG trip units. V4-T-0 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

106 .3 Dimensions and Weights Dimensions in Inches (mm) MD Frame of Poles Width Height Depth, (09.6) (406.4) 4.06 (103.1) MDL-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole R 0.19 (4.8) 1.7 (43.7) 1.50 (38.1) C L Handle Drilling Plan 3.44 (87.3) 3.64 (9.5) 7.8 (184.9) Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs (kg) MD Frame Note 1 Thermal-magnetic only. C L Breaker R 0.5 (6.4) 1.33 (33.7) 3.8 (83.3) 0.97 (4.6) (406.4) Front View 8.5 (09.6) Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit 1 Breaker Type Two-Pole Three-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole MDL, HMDL (T/M T.U.) 6.5 (1.0) 9.0 (13.) 4.5 (11.1) 6.0 (11.8).5 (1.1) 3.0 (1.4) MDL, HMDL (Elec. T.U.) 30.0 (13.6) 6.0 (11.8) 4.0 (1.8) Side View 4.06 (103.) Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-1

107 .3 Typical N-Frame Breaker Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( s) F-Frame (10 5 s) J-Frame (70 50 s) K-Frame ( s) L-Frame ( s) M-Frame ( s) N-Frame ( s) Selection Product Selection Accessories Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions and Weights R-Frame ( s) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4)..... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T-3 V4-T-4 V4-T-3 V4-T-33 V4-T-36 V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-304 N-Frame ( s) Product Description All Eaton N-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use All N-Frame circuit breakers are HACR rated V4-T- Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

108 .3 Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Circuit Breaker/Frame ND 3 1 T3 W Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type ND HND NDC NDU CND CHND CNDC of Poles = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole Circuit Breaker/Frame 800 = 800 amperes 1 = 100 amperes Trip Model T3 = Model 310 T5 = Model 550 T7 = Model 750 T10 = Model 1050 Trip Type = LSI 3 = LS 5 = LSG 6 = LSIG 7 = LSIA E = 100% R.P. protected (four-pole) EH = 50% R.P. protected (four-pole) K = High magnetic molded case switch W = Without terminals X = Load only terminals Y = Line only terminals Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-3

109 .3 Product Selection Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals. Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) Continuous at 40 C OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Fixed Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kaic at 480 Vac 800 ND3800T5W ND3800T56W ND3800T57W 400 ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ND31T5W ND31T56W ND31T57W 600 ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A10 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 800 HND3800T5W HND3800T56W HND3800T57W 400 ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A HND31T5W HND31T56W HND31T57W 600 ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A10 V4-T-4 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

110 .3 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) Continuous at 40 C OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Fixed Plug Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 800 NDC3800T5W NDC3800T56W NDC3800T57W 400 ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A NDC31T5W NDC31T56W NDC31T57W 600 ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A10 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-5

111 .3 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only Continuous at 40 C L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) OPTIM LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Fixed Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kaic at 480 Vac 800 ND3800T106W ND3800T107W 400 ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ND31T106W ND31T107W 600 ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A10 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 800 HND3800T106W HND3800T107W 400 ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A HND31T106W HND31T107W 600 ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A10 Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 800 NDC3800T106W NDC3800T107W 400 ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A NDC31T106W NDC31T107W 600 ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A10 V4-T-6 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

112 .3 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug, terminals. 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) Continuous at 40 C OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. 3 Includes conductor extension kit, which increases breaker length 3.75 on each end. Terminal ordered separate. Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Fixed Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kaic at 480 Vac 800 CND3800T5W CND3800T56W CND3800T57W 400 ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A CND31T5W CND31T56W CND31T57W 600 ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A10 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 800 CHND3800T5W CHND3800T56W CHND3800T57W 400 ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A CHND31T5W CHND31T56W CHND31T57W 600 ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A10 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-7

113 .3 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) Continuous at 40 C OPTIM 550 LSI LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. Zone interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above catalog number. 3 Includes conductor extension kit, which increases breaker length 3.75 on each end. Terminal ordered separate. Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Fixed Plug Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 800 CNDC3800T5W CNDC3800T56W CNDC3800T57W 400 ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A CNDC31T5W CNDC31T56W CNDC31T57W 600 ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A10 V4-T-8 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

114 .3 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) Continuous at 40 C OPTIM LSIG LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch one Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Fixed Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 50 kaic at 480 Vac 800 CND3800T106W CND3800T107W 400 ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A CND31T106W CND31T107W 600 ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A10 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 800 CHND3800T106W CHND3800T107W 400 ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A CHND31T106W CHND31T107W 600 ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A10 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-9

115 .3 100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs, continued Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I t or I 4 t Response) 1 S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) Continuous at 40 C OPTIM LSIG Type ND Molded Case Switches LSIA 1 Long delay I 4 t response selection limits short delay time to flat response. One Form C auxiliary switch one Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard. 3 Factory sealed. 4 Includes conductor extension kit, which increases breaker length 3.75 on each end. Terminal ordered separate. 5 Neutral is in right pole. Molded case switch will trip above 14,000 amperes. For UL listed, series tested molded case switch application data, refer to Eaton. Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Fixed Plug Three-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 800 CNDC3800T106W CNDC3800T107W 400 ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A ORPN80A CNDC31T106W 4 CNDC31T107W 600 ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A ORPN1A10 Type ND High Instantaneous (K) Continuous Three-Pole Four-Pole 5 at 40 C 800 ND3800WK ND4800WK HND3800WK HND4800WK 100 ND31WK ND41WK HND31WK HND41WK V4-T-30 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

116 .3 Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information Line and Load Terminals Ordering Information N-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper or Cu/AI terminals are required, order by catalog number. Specify if factory installation is required. TA700NB1 TA1000NB1 TA100NB1 TA101NB1 T700NB1 T1000NB1 Line and Load Terminals Breaker s 1 Terminal rating is AL9CU. Terminal rating is AL7CU. Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire Range/ No. Conductors Metric Wire Range mm Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals 700 Aluminum Cu/AI kcmil () TA700NB Aluminum Cu/AI 3/0 400 kcmil (3) TA1000NB Aluminum Cu/AI 4/0 500 kcmil (4) TA100NB Aluminum Cu/AI kcmil (3) TA101NB1 Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals 700 Copper Cu /0 500 kcmil () T700NB Copper Cu 3/0 500 kcmil (3) T1000NB1 100 Copper Cu 3/0 400 kcmil (4) T100NB3 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-31

117 .3 Accessories Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. ND Frame Accessories Reference Three-Pole Four-Pole Description Page Left Center Right Left Center Right Neutral Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) 1 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-76 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-76 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) V4-T-78 Auxiliary switch (A, B) V4-T-78 Auxiliary switch (3A, 3B) V4-T-78 Auxiliary switch (1A, 1B) and alarm switch combination V4-T-80 Auxiliary switch (A, B) and alarm switch combination V4-T-80 Shunt trip standard V4-T-84 Shunt trip low energy V4-T-85 Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T-9 Eaton PowerNet communications kit (OPTIM 550) V4-T-93 External Accessories Base mounting hardware V4-T-311 Interphase barriers V4-T-313 Terminal shield V4-T-313 Non-padlockable handle block V4-T-314 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T-315 Key interlock kit V4-T-316 Sliding bar interlock requires two breakers V4-T-317 Walking beam interlock requires two breakers V4-T-317 Electrical (motor) operator V4-T-319 Plug-in adapters V4-T-30 Rear connecting studs V4-T-31 Panelboard connecting straps V4-T-3 Handle mechanisms V4-T-430 Handle extension V4-T-445 Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit V4-T-35 OPTIM System Components Three Poles Ground fault alarm unit V4-T-34 Potential transformer module V4-T-34 Breaker interface module (BIM) V4-T-35 Digitrip OPTIMizer V4-T-35 Auxiliary power module V4-T-35 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special calibration Moisture fungus treatment V4-T-116 Freeze-tested circuit breakers Marine/naval application Legend Applicable in indicated pole position May be mounted on left or right pole not both Accessory available/modification available Note 1 OPTIM 550 and 1050 are factory sealed and do not have the right pole available for accessories. V4-T-3 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

118 .3 Technical Data and Specifications UL 489 Interrupting Capacity s 1 Circuit Breaker Type of Poles Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical s) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) ND, 3, CND, 3, HND, 3, CHND, 3, NDC, 3, CNDC, 3, NDU IEC 947- Interrupting Capacity s 1 Circuit Breaker Type of Poles Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical s) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) ND I cu, 3, I cs, 3, CND I cu, 3, I cs, 3, HND I cu, 3, I cs, 3, CHND I cu, 3, I cs, 3, NDC I cu, 3, I cs, 3, CNDC I cu, 3, I cs, 3, Utilization Category A circuit breakers. 100% rated breakers amperes maximum rating. 4 Successfully tested at 300 kaic, although UL recognizes maximum of 00 kaic at 40 Vac. 5 Successfully tested at 75 kaic, although UL recognizes maximum of 65 kaic at 600 Vac. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-33

119 .3 N-Frame Digitrip Trip Unit Type Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 rms sensing Yes Yes Breaker Type Frame N N range A A Interrupting rating at 480 volts 50, 65, 100 (ka) 50, 65, 100 (ka) Protection Ordering options LSI, LSIG, LSI(A) LSI(A), LISG Fixed rated plug (I n ) Yes Yes Overtemperature trip Yes Yes Long Delay Protection (L) Adjustable rating plug (I n ) No No Long delay pickup x (I n ) x (I n ) Long delay time I t 4 seconds 4 seconds Long delay time I 4 t 1 5 seconds 1 5 seconds Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes High load alarm No x I r Short Delay Protection (S) Short delay pickup % x (I r ) % x (I r ) Short delay time I t ms ms Short delay time flat ms ms Short delay time zone selective interlocking Yes Yes Instantaneous Protection (I) Instantaneous pickup % x (I n ) % x (I n ) Discriminator Yes Yes Instantaneous override Yes Yes Ground Fault Protection (G) Ground fault alarm 0 100% x (I s ) 0 100% x (I s ) Ground fault pickup 0 100% x (I s ) 0 100% x (I s ) Ground fault delay I t ms ms Ground fault delay flat ms ms Ground fault zone selective interlocking Yes 1 Yes Ground fault thermal memory Yes Yes System Diagnostics Status LEDs Yes Yes Cause of trip LEDs Yes Yes Magnitude of trip information Yes Yes Remote signal contact ground alarm Yes 1 Yes Local auxiliary and bell alarm contact Optional Included Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm I s = Sensor I n = Plug I r = Long Delay Pickup Setting Note 1 Zone interlock kit. V4-T-34 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

120 .3 N-Frame Digitrip, continued Trip Unit Type Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 System Monitoring Digital display Yes 1 Yes 1 Current Yes Yes Power and energy No Yes Power quality harmonics No Yes Power factor No Yes Communications Eaton PowerNet No Yes Testing Testing method OPTIMizer, BIM, OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet PowerNet Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm I s = Sensor I n = Plug I r = Long Delay Pickup Setting 1 By OPTIMizer/BIM. Eaton s PowerNet kit. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-35

121 .3 Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) ND Frame of Poles Width Height Depth, (09.6) (406.4) 5.50 (139.7) (8.6) (406.4) 5.50 (139.7) ND-Frame, Two- and Three-Pole 1.91 (48.4) 3.68 (93.) 1.50 (38.1) Front Cover Cutout 3.44 (87.3) 1.7 (43.6) C L Handle 3.19 (80.9) 6.38 (161.9) 0.5 R (6.4 R) C L Handle 0.19 R (4.8 R) Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg) ND Frame Complete Breaker Breaker Type Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole ND, HND, NDC, NDU 37 (16.8) 45 (0.4) 58 (6.3) Front View (406.4) ON/I OFF/O 8.5 (09.6) Side View 5.50 (139.7) V4-T-36 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

122 .3 Typical R-Frame Breaker Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( s) F-Frame (10 5 s) J-Frame (70 50 s) K-Frame ( s) L-Frame ( s) M-Frame ( s) N-Frame ( s) R-Frame ( s) Selection Product Selection Accessories Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions and Weights Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4)..... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-38 V4-T-39 V4-T-51 V4-T-5 V4-T-55 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-304 R-Frame ( s) Product Description Eaton R-Frame circuit breakers are available as frame (which includes trip unit), rating plug and terminals All R-Frame circuit breakers are suitable for reverse feed use Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-37

123 .3 Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Circuit Breaker/Frame Circuit Breaker/ Frame Type RD RDC CRD CRDC 1 For complete list of available trip types, refer to Pages V4-T-39 to V4-T-48. No four-pole for CRD and CRDC. of Poles 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole Circuit Breaker/Frame 16 = 1600 amperes 0 = 000 amperes 5 = 500 amperes RD 3 16 T53 W Trip Type 1 T53 = Digitrip RMS 510 LS T65 = Digitrip RMS 610 LSG T86 = Digitrip RMS 810 LSIG T96 = Digitrip RMS 910 LSIG T106 = Digitrip OPTIM 1050 LSIG T107 = Digitrip OPTIM 1050 LSIA W = Without terminals P = 100% protected neutral pole R = Ground fault remote (310 only) K = Molded case switch V4-T-38 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

124 .3 Product Selection Digitrip RMS 510 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. Digitrip RMS 510 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup Continuous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG at 40 C Digitrip Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 RD316T51W RD316T53W RD316T5W RD316T54W RD316T55W RD316T56W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RD30T51W RD30T53W RD30T5W RD30T54W RD30T55W RD30T56W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RD35T51W RD35T53W RD35T5W RD35T54W RD35T55W RD35T56W 1600 RP6R5A RP6R5A RP6R5A50 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 RDC316T51W RDC316T53W RDC316T5W RDC316T54W RDC316T55W RDC316T56W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RDC30T51W RDC30T53W RDC30T5W RDC30T54W RDC30T55W RDC30T56W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RDC35T51W RDC35T53W RDC35T5W RDC35T54W RDC35T55W RDC35T56W 1600 RP6R5A RP6R5A RP6R5A50 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-39

125 .3 100% Rated Digitrip RMS 510 Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at 75 C ampacity. Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. 100% Rated Digitrip RMS 510 Circuit Breakers Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup Continuous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG at 40 C Note 1 Includes B016RDL rear connectors. Digitrip Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 CRD316T51W CRD316T53W CRD316T5W CRD316T54W CRD316T55W CRD316T56W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A CRD30T51W CRD30T53W CRD30T5W CRD30T54W CRD30T55W CRD30T56W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A00 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 CRDC316T53W CRDC316T5W CRDC316T54W CRDC316T55W CRDC316T56W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A CRDC30T51W CRDC30T53W CRDC30T5W CRDC30T54W CRDC30T55W CRDC30T56W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A00 V4-T-40 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

126 .3 Digitrip RMS 610 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. Digitrip RMS 610 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup Continuous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG at 40 C Digitrip Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 RD316T61W RD316T63W RD316T6W RD316T64W RD316T65W RD316T66W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RD30T61W RD30T63W RD30T6W RD30T64W RD30T65W RD30T66W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RD35T61W RD35T63W RD35T6W RD35T64W RD35T65W RD35T66W 1600 RP6R5A RP6R5A RP6R5A50 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 RDC316T61W RDC316T63W RDC316T6W RDC316T64W RDC316T65W RDC316T66W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RDC30T61W RDC30T63W RDC30T6W RDC30T64W RDC30T65W RDC30T66W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RDC35T61W RDC35T63W RDC35T6W RDC35T64W RDC35T65W RDC35T66W 1600 RP6R5A RP6R5A RP6R5A50 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-41

127 .3 100% Rated Digitrip RMS 610 Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at 75 C ampacity. Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. 100% Rated Digitrip RMS 610 Circuit Breakers Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup Continuous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG at 40 C Note 1 Includes B016RDL rear connectors. Digitrip Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 CRD316T61W CRD316T63W CRD316T6W CRD316T64W CRD316T65W CRD316T66W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A CRD30T61W CRD30T63W CRD30T6W CRD30T64W CRD30T65W CRD30T66W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A00 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 CRDC316T61W CRDC316T63W CRDC316T6W CRDC316T64W CRDC316T65W CRDC316T66W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A CRDC30T61W CRDC30T63W CRDC30T6W CRDC30T64W CRDC30T65W CRDC30T66W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A00 V4-T-4 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

128 .3 Digitrip RMS 810 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. Digitrip RMS 810 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup Continuous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG at 40 C Digitrip Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 RD316T81W RD316T83W RD316T8W RD316T84W RD316T85W RD316T86W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RD30T81W RD30T83W RD30T8W RD30T84W RD30T85W RD30T86W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RD35T81W RD35T83W RD35T8W RD35T84W RD35T85W RD35T86W 1600 RP6R5A RP6R5A RP6R5A50 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 RDC316T81W RDC316T83W RDC316T8W RDC316T84W RDC316T85W RDC316T86W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RDC30T81W RDC30T83W RDC30T8W RDC30T84W RDC30T85W RDC30T86W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RDC35T81W RDC35T83W RDC35T8W RDC35T84W RDC35T85W RDC35T86W 1600 RP6R5A RP6R5A RP6R5A50 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-43

129 .3 100% Rated Digitrip RMS 810 Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at 75 C ampacity. Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. 100% Rated Digitrip RMS 810 Circuit Breakers Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup Continuous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG at 40 C Note 1 Includes B016RDL rear connectors. Digitrip Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 CRD316T81W CRD316T83W CRD316T8W CRD316T84W CRD316T85W CRD316T86W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A CRD30T81W CRD30T83W CRD30T8W CRD30T84W CRD30T85W CRD30T86W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A00 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 CRDC316T81W CRDC316T83W CRDC316T8W CRDC316T84W CRDC316T85W CRDC316T86W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A CRDC30T81W CRDC30T83W CRDC30T8W CRDC30T84W CRDC30T85W CRDC30T86W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A00 V4-T-44 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

130 .3 Digitrip RMS 910 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. Digitrip RMS 910 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup Continuous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG at 40 C Digitrip Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 RD316T91W RD316T93W RD316T9W RD316T94W RD316T95W RD316T96W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RD30T91W RD30T93W RD30T9W RD30T94W RD30T95W RD30T96W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RD35T91W RD35T93W RD35T9W RD35T94W RD35T95W RD35T96W 1600 RP6R5A RP6R5A RP6R5A50 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 RDC316T91W RDC316T93W RDC316T9W RDC316T94W RDC316T95W RDC316T96W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RDC30T91W RDC30T93W RDC30T9W RDC30T94W RDC30T95W RDC30T96W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RDC35T91W RDC35T93W RDC35T9W RDC35T94W RDC35T95W RDC35T96W 1600 RP6R5A RP6R5A RP6R5A50 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-45

131 .3 100% Rated Digitrip RMS 910 Circuit Breakers The NEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90 C wire is applied at 75 C ampacity. Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. 100% Rated Digitrip RMS 910 Circuit Breakers Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup Continuous G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) LI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG at 40 C Note 1 Includes B016RDL rear connectors. Digitrip Plug Only Rated Current (I n ) Fixed Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 CRD316T91W CRD316T93W CRD316T9W CRD316T94W CRD316T95W CRD316T96W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A CRD30T91W CRD30T93W CRD30T9W CRD30T94W CRD30T95W CRD30T96W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A00 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 CRDC316T91W CRDC316T93W CRDC316T9W CRDC316T94W CRDC316T95W CRDC316T96W 800 RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A RP6R16A CRDC30T91W CRDC30T93W CRDC30T9W CRDC30T94W CRDC30T95W CRDC30T96W 1000 RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A RP6R0A00 V4-T-46 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

132 .3 Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) Continuous at 40 C LSIA 1050 LSIG 1050 Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Fixed Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 RD316T107W RD316T106W 800 ORPR16A ORPR16A ORPR16A ORPR16A RD30T107W RD30T106W 1000 ORPR0A ORPR0A ORPR0A ORPR0A RD35T107W RD35T106W 1600 ORPR5A ORPR5A ORPR5A50 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 RDC316T107W RDC316T106W 800 ORPR16A ORPR16A ORPR16A ORPR16A RDC30T107W RDC30T106W 1000 ORPR0A ORPR0A ORPR0A ORPR0A RDC35T107W RDC35T106W 1600 ORPR5A ORPR5A ORPR5A50 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-47

133 .3 100% Rated 600 Volts AC Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Order as individual components: breaker frame (which includes trip unit) and rating plug. 100% Rated 600 Volts AC Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Plugs Circuit Breaker Frame Only L Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (I r ) with Adjustable Long Delay Time S Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I t or Flat Response) I Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup G Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) A Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I t or Flat Response) Continuous at 40 C Molded Case Switches Refer to Eaton for UL listed, series tested Molded Case Switch application data. LSIA 1050 LSIG 1050 Digitrip OPTIM Plug Only Fixed Plug Three-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 65 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 CRD316T107W CRD316T106W 800 ORPR16A ORPR16A ORPR16A ORPR16A CRD30T107W CRD30T106W 1000 ORPR0A ORPR0A ORPR0A ORPR0A00 Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Vac Rated 100 kaic at 480 Vac 1600 CRDC316T107W CRDC316T106W 800 ORPR16A ORPR16A ORPR16A ORPR16A CRDC30T107W CRDC30T106W 1000 ORPR0A ORPR0A ORPR0A ORPR0A00 Type RD High Instantaneous (K) Complete without Terminals Continuous Three-Pole Four-Pole at 40 C 1600 RD316WK RD416WK 000 RD30WK RD40WK 1 Includes B016RDL rear connectors. Molded case switch may trip above 17,500 amperes. V4-T-48 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

134 .3 Accessories Selection Guide and Ordering Information Line and Load Terminals Line and load terminals provide wire connecting capabilities for specific ranges of continuous current ratings and wire types. All terminals comply with Underwriters Laboratories Standards UL 486A and UL 486B and CSA C. No. 65M. Unless otherwise specified, R-Frame circuit breaker line load terminals are shipped separately for field installation. Line and Load Terminals Breaker s Terminal Body Material Wire Type Ordering Information R-Frame circuit breakers have Cu/AI terminals as standard and Cu only terminals as an option. Specify if factory installation is required. Hardware AWG/kcmil Wire Range/ No. Conductors Metric Wire Range mm Wire Terminals 1600 Aluminum Cu/AI English (4) TA1600RD 1600 Copper Cu English (4) T1600RD 000 Aluminum Cu/AI English 600 (6) TA000RD 1 Rear Connectors 000 Copper English B016RD 000 Copper English B016RDL 500 Copper English B500RD 3 1 includes bus connection, terminals and hardware for either line side or load side of three-pole breaker. For use with 100% rated 1600 A and 000 A frame. Do not order separately unless for replacement purposes. Included in breaker carton when 100% rated device is ordered. 3 For use with 500 A frame. Do not order separately unless for replacement purposes. Included in breaker carton when 500 A breaker is ordered. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-49

135 V4-T-50 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October Mounting Hardware Breaker Line/Load Conductors TA000RD

136 .3 Accessories Allowable Accessory Combinations Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit breaker. RD Frame Accessories Description Legend Applicable in indicated pole position Accessory available/modification available 1 All accessories mount in the RH cavity which will accept one each shunt trip, UVR, auxiliary switch and alarm switch. Mounts outside breaker. 3 Included with breaker. Reference Page Three-Pole Four-Pole Left Center Right Left Center Right Neu. Internal Accessories 1 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-76 Alarm lockout (Make/Break) V4-T-76 Auxiliary switch (A, B) V4-T-76 Auxiliary switch (4A, 4B) V4-T-76 Shunt trip standard V4-T-84 Shunt trip low energy V4-T-85 Undervoltage release mechanism V4-T-9 Accessory terminal block V4-T-93 External Accessories Base mounting hardware V4-T-311 Padlockable handle lock hasp V4-T-314 Key interlock kit V4-T-316 Walking beam interlock V4-T-317 Electrical (motor) operator V4-T-319 Handle mechanisms V4-T-430 Handle extension 3 V4-T-445 OPTIM System Components Breaker interface module (BIM) V4-T-35 Digitrip OPTIMizer V4-T-35 Auxiliary power module V4-T-35 Modifications (Refer to Eaton) Special calibration Moisture fungus treatment V4-T-116 Freeze-tested circuit breakers Marine/naval application Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-51

137 .3 Technical Data and Specifications UL 489/CSA Interrupting Capacity s 1 Circuit Breaker Type of Poles IEC 947- Interrupting Capacity s 1 1 Utilization Category A circuit breakers. 100% rated breakers. See Page V4-T-53 for Trip Unit Specifications. Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical s) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) RD 3, CRD RDC 3, CRDC Circuit Breaker Type of Poles Interrupting Capacity (ka Symmetrical s) Volts AC (50/60 Hz) RD I cu 3, I cs 3, RDC I cu 3, I cs 3, V4-T-5 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

138 .3 Specifications R-Frame Digitrip Trip Unit Type Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm I s = Sensor I n = Plug I r = Long Delay Pickup Setting x I n 1 Except 500 ampere frame is %. Varies by frame. 3 LS/LSG only. 4 Not to exceed 100 amperes. Digitrip RMS 510 Digitrip RMS 610 Digitrip RMS 810 Digitrip RMS 910 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 rms sensing Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Breaker Type Frame R R R R R range A A A A A Interrupting rating at 480 volts 65, 100 (ka) 65, 100 (ka) 65, 100 (ka) 65, 100 (ka) 65, 100 (ka) Protection Ordering options LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSI(A), LISG LSG, LSIG LSG, LSIG LSG, LSIG LSG, LSIG Fixed rated plug (I n ) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Overtemperature trip Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Long Delay Protection (L) Adjustable rating plug (I n ) No No No No No Long delay pickup x (I n ) x (I n ) x (I n ) x (I n ) x (I n ) Long delay time I t 4 seconds 4 seconds 4 seconds 4 seconds 4 seconds Long delay time I 4 t No No No No 1 5 Seconds Long delay thermal memory Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes High load alarm No 0.85 x I r 0.85 x I r 0.85 x I r x I r Short Delay Protection (S) Short delay pickup % S1 and S x (I r ) % S1 and S x (I r ) % S1 and S x (I r ) % S1 and S x (I r ) % x (I r ) 1 Short delay time I t ms ms ms ms ms Short delay time flat ms ms ms ms ms Short delay time zone selective interlocking Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Instantaneous Protection (I) Instantaneous pickup % % % % % x (I n ) M1and M x (I n ) M1and M x (I n ) M1and M x (I n ) M1and M x (I n ) Discriminator Yes 3 Yes 3 Yes 3 Yes 3 Yes Instantaneous override Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Ground Fault Protection (G) Ground fault alarm 4 No No No No 5 100% x (I n ) Ground fault pickup % x (I s ) 5-100% x (I s ) 5 100% x (I s ) 5 100% x (I s ) 5 100% x (I n ) Ground fault delay I t ms ms ms ms ms Ground fault delay flat ms ms ms ms ms Ground fault zone selective interlocking Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Ground fault thermal memory Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-53

139 .3 R-Frame Digitrip, continued Trip Unit Type Legend BIM = Breaker Interface Module (A) = GF Alarm I s = Sensor I n = Plug I r = Long Delay Pickup Setting x I n Note 1 By OPTIMizer/BIM. Digitrip RMS 510 Digitrip RMS 610 Digitrip RMS 810 Digitrip RMS 910 Digitrip OPTIM 1050 System Diagnostics Status LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Cause of trip LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Magnitude of trip information No Yes Yes Yes Yes Remote signal contacts No Yes Yes Yes Yes System Monitoring Digital display No Yes Yes Yes Yes 1 Current No Yes Yes Yes Yes Voltage No No No Yes No Power and energy No No Yes Yes Yes Power quality harmonics No No No Yes Yes Power factor No No Yes (over Yes Yes Eaton PowerNet only) Communications Eaton PowerNet No No Yes Yes Yes Testing Testing method Integral Integral Integral Integral OPTIMizer, BIM, PowerNet V4-T-54 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

140 Push To Trip.3 Dimensions and Weights Dimensions in Inches (mm) RD Frame of Poles Width Height Depth (393.7) (406.4) 9.75 (47.7) (508.0) (406.4) 9.75 (47.7) RD-Frame, Three-Pole, 1600 and 000 s 5.09 (19.4) 9.69 (46.1) 7.5 (184.) CL Handle (368.3) CL Breaker (0.4) Dia. (4 Holes) Use 4, 0.38 (Mil) Dia. Bolts for Mounting Breaker 7.75 (196.9) (381.0) Front View (393.7) Side View 9.00 (8.6) (406.4) 6.65 (166.7) 1.91 (37.8) 0.16 (4.0) R Typ. Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs (kg) RD Frame Complete Breaker Breaker Type Three-Pole Four-Pole 1600 s RD, CRD 1, RDC, CRDC 1 10 (46.3) 135 (61.) 000 s RD, RDC 10 (46.3) 135 (61.) CRD, CRDC 130 (59.0) 175 (79.4) 500 s RD, RDC 135 (61.) 18 (8.6) Note 1 No four-pole for CRD and CRDC. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-55

141 .3 Motor Circuit Protectors Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( s) F-Frame (10 5 s) J-Frame (70 50 s) K-Frame ( s) L-Frame ( s) M-Frame ( s) N-Frame ( s) R-Frame ( s) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Selection Product Selection Accessories Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4)..... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-57 V4-T-58 V4-T-59 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-304 Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Product Description Designated as Eaton s Types GMCP and HMCP, the instantaneous-only motor circuit protector (MCP) is available in ratings from 3 A to 100 A for motor starter sizes 0 through 8. An innovative design of internal components allows higher MCP-starter combination interrupting ratings. The MCP is marked to permit proper electrical application within the assigned equipment ratings. Standards and Certifications The MCP is designed to comply with the applicable requirements of Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489, Canadian Standards Association Standard C. No. 5.1, and International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC The MCP is a recognized component (UL File E7819) and complies with the applicable requirements of Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 489. It is also designed to comply with the applicable requirements of Canadian Standards Association Standard C. No. 5.1, International Electrotechnical Commission Recommendations IEC 157-1, and nameplates bear the CE marking. Note: Interrupting ratings are dependent on starter it is used with. V4-T-56 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

142 .3 Selection This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalog numbers. It is not to be used to build catalog numbers for circuit breakers or trip units. Motor Circuit Protector Motor Circuit Protector Note Motor Circuit Protective Type HMCP = Three-pole HMP = Two-pole 1 HMCPS = Three-pole 1 On J- and K-Frame HMCPs only. Motor Circuit Protective Device GMCP = Three-pole Continuous Continuous HMCP 003 A0 C Magnetic Trip Range/ NEMA Starter Size A0 = 9 30/0 C0 = 1 70/0 E0 = /0 D0 = 40 60/0 H1 = /1 G = 80 10/ K = / J = / M = / L3 = /3 R3 = /3 T4 = /4 U4 = /4 A5 = /5 C5 = /5 D5 = /5 F5 = /5 G5 = /5 J5 = /5 K5 = /5 L5 = /5 W5 = /5 N5 = /5 R5 = /5 X5 = /5 Y5 = /5 L6 = /6 (electronic) X6 = /6 (electronic) Y6 = /6 (electronic) X7 = /7 (electronic) Y8 = /8 (electronic) GMCP 003 A0 C Magnetic Trip Range/NEMA Starter Size A0 = 15 30/0 C0 = 35 70/0 E0 = /0 H1 = /1 K = / J = / M = / C = Non-aluminum terminals W = Without terminals X = Load terminals only Y = Line terminals only S = Stainless steel terminals (150A frame only) No : Standard terminals on line and load C = Non-aluminum terminals Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-57

143 .3 Product Selection G-Frame 480 Vac, 600Y/347 Vac NEMA Starter Size Continuous s Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current s (FLA) 1 MCP Trip Setting MCP 0 3 A GMCP003A0C B C D E.0. 7 F A GMCP007C0C B C D E F A GMCP015E0C B C D E F A GMCP030H1C B C D E F A GMCP050KC B C D E F A GMCP060JC B C D E F A GMCP063MC B D E F Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate Cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. All GMCP 3 63A come with line and load steel body terminals for Cu only wire. Refer to Page V4-T-1 under Optional Terminal Types. UL recognized and CSA approved. V4-T-58 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

144 .3 Accessories Modifications for GMCP Internal accessories must be factory installed. Internal Accessories 1 Type Accessory External Mounted Accessories Units Description in Package Modifications for HMCP See Internal Accessories starting on Page V4-T-73. Handle Mechanisms for Frames Kits Only (Kit Includes Shaft, Mechanism and Handle) GMCP-Frame Type GMCP-Frame Description NEMA IP Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle Mechanisms G Direct 5 1 Only one accessory may be installed in GMCP. LH only. 3 RH only. 4 For use with standard 35 mm DIN rail such as, 35 x 7.5 or 15 mm per DIN EN Suitable for use on two- or three-pole G-Frame. No UVR available on GMCP. Electrical s Volts Frequency s Contact Arrangement Factory Style Shunt trip 10 50/60 Hz 1.1 S5 1373D6G18 Shunt trip 40 50/60 Hz.1 S6 1373D6G19 Auxiliary switch /60 Hz 6.0 1A/1B A3 188C74G03 Auxiliary switch /60 Hz 6.0 A/B A6 188C73G03 Alarm switch /60 Hz 6.0 Make/Break B3 188C75G03 Auxiliary switch/alarm switch combination /60 Hz 6.0 1A/1B Make/Break B13 188C76G09 Style Lock dog (non-padlockable) 1 194C01H01 Mounting hardware 1 64B375G3 DIN rail adapter C79G0 S01 Blue Handle S01 Red Handle Frame S01 blue handle, 1-inch shaft S01 red handle, 1-inch shaft 1/3R/1 54 GMHMVD1B / 68C6039G05 4/4X 65 GMHMVD1BX / 68C6039G07 1/3R/1 54 GMHMVD1R / 68C6039G06 4/4X 65 GMHMVD1RX / 68C6039G08 Black Handle Yellow Handle With Shroud Without Shroud With Shroud Without Shroud GMCP HRGMC1S HRGMC10 HRGMC3S HRGMC30 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-59

145 .3 F-Frame 600 Vac, 50 Vdc 600 Vac, 50 Vdc, continued NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current s (FLA) 1 MCP Trip Setting MCP 0 3 A HMCP003A0C B C D E F G.0. 7 H A HMCP007C0C B C D E F G H A HMCP015E0C B C D E F G H A HMCP030H1C B C D E F G H A HMCP050KC B C D E F G H NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current s (FLA) 1 MCP Trip Setting MCP 70 A HMCP070MC B C D E F G H A HMCP100R3C B C D E F G H A HMCP150T4C B C D D E F G H A HMCP150U4C B C D E F G 3 50 H Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate Cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 3 Settings above 130 amperes are for special applications. NEC Article (a) requires the ampere rating of the disconnecting means to be not less than 115% of the motor full load ampere rating. HMCP A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB. HMCP 150A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T150FB. V4-T-60 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

146 .3 Special Low Magnetic Protection Application MCP 600 Vac, 50 Vdc Cont. Amps Cam Setting MCP Trip Setting 1 MCP 5 A 40 HMCP05D0C B 43 D 49 E 5 F 55 G 58 H A 80 HMCP050GC B 87 C 93 D 98 E 103 F 109 G 115 H A 115 HMCP070JC B 1 C 130 D 139 E 145 F 153 G 160 H A 160 HMCP100L3C B 174 C 185 D 196 E 07 F 18 G 9 H 40 1 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. HMCP A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-61

147 .3 MCPs for Application with Motor Starters Equipped with Electronic Overload Relays 600 Vac, 50 Vdc 600 Vac, 50 Vdc, continued NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current s (FLA) 1 MCP Trip Setting MCP 0 3 A HMCPS003A0C B C D E F G.0. 7 H A HMCPS007C0C B C D E F G H A HMCPS015E0C B C D E F G H A HMCPS030H1C B C D E F G H A HMCPS050KC B C D E F G H NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current s (FLA) 1 MCP Trip Setting MCP A HMCPS100R3C B C D E F G H A HMCPS150T4C B C D E F G H A HMCPS150U4C B C D E F G 3 50 H Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 3 Settings above 130A are for special applications. NEC Article (a) requires the ampere rating of the disconnecting means to be not less than 115% of the motor full load ampere rating. HMCP A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB. HMCPS A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB. HMCPS 150A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T150FB. V4-T-6 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

148 .3 J-Frame 600 Vac, 50 Vdc 600 Vac, 50 Vdc, continued NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current s (FLA) 1 MCP Trip Setting MCP A HMCP50A5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP50C5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP50D5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP50F5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP50G5C B C D E F G H I NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current s (FLA) 1 MCP Trip Setting MCP A HMCP50J5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP50K5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP50L5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP50W5C B C D E F G H I Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 3 Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin with HMP in place of HMCP. All HMCP and HMP 50A come with line and load steel body terminals, T50KB. (With suffix C, without C comes with TA50KB.) Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-63

149 .3 K-Frame 600 Vac, 50 Vdc 600 Vac, 50 Vdc, continued NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current s (FLA) 1 MCP Trip Setting MCP A HMCP400A5C B C D HMCP400A5C E F G H I A HMCP400D5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP400F5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP400G5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP400J5C B C D E F G H I NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current s (FLA) 1 MCP Trip Setting MCP A HMCP400K5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP400L5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP400W5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP400N5C B C D E F G H I Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 3 Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin with HMP in place of HMCP. All HMCP and HMP 400 A come with aluminum body terminals, 3TA400K. numbers with suffix C as shown above come with copper body terminals 3T400K. V4-T-64 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

150 Vac, 50 Vdc, continued NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current s (FLA) 1 MCP Trip Setting MCP A HMCP400R5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP400X5C B C D E F G H I A HMCP400Y5C B C D E F G H I L-Frame 600 Vac 4 NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current s (FLA) 1 MCP Trip Setting MCP A HMCP600L6W B C D E F G H A HMCP600X6W B C D E F G H A HMCP600Y6W B C D E F G H Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 x the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 x setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 3 Three-pole catalog numbers shown. Two-pole catalog numbers begin with HMP in place of HMCP. 4 Equipped with electronic trip device. All HMCP and HMP 400 A come with aluminum body terminals, 3TA400K. numbers with suffix C as shown above come with copper body terminals 3T400K. All HMCP 600 A come without terminals. For terminals, see Page V4-T-17. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-65

151 .3 N-Frame 600 Vac 1 NEMA Starter Size Cont. Amps Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current s (FLA) MCP Trip Setting MCP A HMCP800X7W B C D E F G A HMCP1Y8W B C D E F G Equipped with electronic trip device. Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13X the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13X setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. V4-T-66 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

152 .3 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Product Description Motor protection circuit breakers (MPCBs) provide UL 489 branch circuit protection, UL 508 and CSA C. No. 14 motor protection, and meet IEC and requirements. Typical branch motor loads are protected by three-component starters, consisting of breaker, contactor and overload relay, or fuse, contactor and overload relay. The MPCB application-specific protection eliminates the need for motor overload relay found in the traditional three-component starter assembly. The branch motor load protection is simplified to an MPCB and contactor, reducing both space requirements and heat generation in customer panels. Protection is provided by application-specific electronic trip units. The electronic trip unit provides typical motor overload relay functionality and short-circuit protection against potential phase-tophase or phase-to-ground faults. Disconnecting means Branch circuit short-circuit protection Overload protection Class 5, 10, 15 and 0 Phase unbalance protection FDMP breaker trips when there is a 40% difference between any phase compared to the calculated three-phase average Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( s) F-Frame (10 5 s) J-Frame (70 50 s) K-Frame ( s) L-Frame ( s) M-Frame ( s) N-Frame ( s) R-Frame ( s) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Product Selection Technical Data and Specifications Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4)..... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Phase loss protection Active when the maximum phase current is greater than 50% of FLA setting Breaker will trip when minimum phase current is 5% or less than the maximum phase current Time delay of 1 or seconds before breaker trips Thermal memory to prevent immediate restart after overload trip to allow motor to cool down Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-68 V4-T-68 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-304 The MPCB is based on the F-Frame. Accessories for standard breakers apply to the MPCB. Unlike Motor Circuit Protectors (MCPs), MPCBs are UL 489 listed with 35 ka and 65 ka interruption ratings. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-67

153 .3 Product Selection FDMP and HFDMP Continuous s FLA le Dial Setting Continuous s A B C D E F G H Technical Data and Specifications Specifications Feature FDMP HFDMP Interruption rating at 40 V 65 ka 100 ka Interruption rating at 480 V 35 ka 65 ka Interruption rating at 600 V 18 ka 5 ka Icu/Ics at 40 V 65 ka/33 ka ka/50 ka 1 Icu/Ics at 415 V 35 ka/18 ka 1 65 ka/33 ka 1 100% rated No No FLA range (A) Motor class protection 5, 10, 15, 0 5, 10, 15, 0 Phase unbalance protection (current) active for phase current 40% delta (single-phase): (three-phase avg.) for 5 seconds 40% delta (single-phase): (three-phase avg.) for 5 seconds >0.5 FLA setting Phase loss protection (current) active for phase current Min. phase 0.5 max. phase for 1 second Min. phase 0.5 max. phase for 1 second >0.5 FLA setting 1 IEC ratings available only on FWMP and HFWMP. For additional breaker solutions, see Page V4-T ka Without Phase Unbalance, Class 10 Motor Protection Only 35 ka With Phase Unbalance and Adjustable Motor Class Protection 65 ka Without Phase Unbalance, Class 10 Motor Protection Only 65 ka With Phase Unbalance and Adjustable Motor Class Protection 80 FDMP3080L FDMP3080JL HFDMP3080L HFDMP3080JL 100 FDMP3100L FDMP3100JL HFDMP3100L HFDMP3100JL 160 FDMP3160L FDMP3160JL HFDMP3160L HFDMP3160JL 05 FDMP305L FDMP305JL HFDMP305L HFDMP305JL Thermal memory protection Yes Yes High load indicator Pre-detection relays Internal accessories Factory installed Factory installed Aux. alarm, shunt trip, UVR Aux. alarm, shunt trip, UVR V4-T-68 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

154 .3 Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4) Product Description Eaton s Type ELC current limiter attachment for the MCP is designed to provide increased interrupting capacity. The combination may be used for the application up to 00,000 A symmetrical at 600 Vac, making the MCP suitable for use in network distribution systems or other applications where unusually high fault currents are available. The current limiter connects to the load end of the MCP and is provided with terminals suitable for copper or aluminum conductors. (See table at right.) Limiters are coordinated with the MCP so that normal fault currents are interrupted automatically by the MCP without any damage to the limiter. Only the rare very high fault is opened by the limiter. Faults that are interrupted by the limiter also magnetically trip the MCP, opening all three poles, preventing singlephase operation. Each of the three poles of the Type ELC limiter is equipped with an indicator that extends when a fault is interrupted by the limiter. Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( s) F-Frame (10 5 s) J-Frame (70 50 s) K-Frame ( s) L-Frame ( s) M-Frame ( s) N-Frame ( s) R-Frame ( s) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4) Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Product Selection Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment Technical Data and Specifications ELC Current Limiter Attachment MCP (s) 3 ELC3003R 7 ELC3007R 15 ELC3015R 30 ELC3030R 50 ELC3050R 100 ELC3100R 150 ELC3150R Type ELC Current Limiter Terminal Wire Sizes 1 Type ELC Current Wire Range Limiter s AWG Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-304 Metric (mm ) Standard Aluminum Terminals / / Non-Standard Terminals (Steel) Terminal wire connectors are UL listed for standard stranded wire sizes as defined in UL 486A or UL 486B. Optional on special order for copper cable only. All HMCP 800 A and 100 A come without terminals. For terminals, see Page V4-T-17. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-69

155 .3 Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Product Overview Power demand continues to grow in new and existing facilities. To meet increased demand, larger utility supplies, spot networks and large facility transformers are installed. The increased capacity of the electrical source results in increased fault currents in excess of 100 ka short-circuit protection. Eaton manufactures non-fused current limiting modules with interrupting capacities up to 00 ka at 600 Vac. Unlike fused current limiters with a one-time use, a current limiter module provides an automatic reset of the module after a short-circuit event. Resetting the moldedcase circuit breaker is the only action required to restore critical power to the system; there is no time wasted with sourcing the correct replacement fuses or module to bring the system back online. Product Description The current limiting breaker modules use a unique contact design to enhance the system protection similar to that of the circuit breaker. When high short-circuit current is flowing through the contacts of these modules, the design results in very high interrupting capacities and improved current limiting characteristics. Application Description High-performance breakers are most commonly applied when very high fault levels are available and with applications where the current limiting capability is used upstream of the final load to limit current. Typical loads include lighting, power distribution, and motor control applications. Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( s) F-Frame (10 5 s) J-Frame (70 50 s) K-Frame ( s) L-Frame ( s) M-Frame ( s) N-Frame ( s) R-Frame ( s) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4)..... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Product Selection Dimensions and Weights Internal Accessories External Accessories Features and Benefits Superior system protection: Auto reset improves system uptime and eliminates the need for finding replacement parts No fuses to replace, reducing the overall cost of ownership and the waste created by fuses Overloads, by using inverse time current tripping characteristics of the molded-case circuit breaker Low-level short circuits, by using instantaneous and/or short-time delay tripping characteristics of the molded-case circuit breaker High-level short circuits, by using ultra-high-speed, blow-apart contacts of the current limiting module in series with the circuit breaker contacts Let-through currents, by improved opening speed of the contacts, the resultant rapid rise of arc voltage introduces impedance into the system Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-71 V4-T-7 V4-T-73 V4-T-304 Standards and Certifications UL 489 CSA C. V4-T-70 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

156 .3 Product Selection FD Frame High Performance s Type Product s 480 Vac (UL) 600 Vac (UL) FDC 3P thermal-magnetic Breaker only With limiter FD IC 00 kaic at 600 Vac 1 Limiter Terminals Breaker s Breaker Load Terminals (For Line Mounted Limiters Only) Breaker with Line Side Mounted Current Limiter Thermal-Magnetic 40 FDC3040Q01 FDC3040Q0 45 FDC3045Q01 FDC3045Q0 50 FDC3050Q01 FDC3050Q0 60 FDC3060Q01 FDC3060Q0 70 FDC3070Q01 FDC3070Q0 80 FDC3080Q01 FDC3080Q0 90 FDC3090Q01 FDC3090Q0 100 FDC3100Q01 FDC3100Q0 110 FDC3110Q01 FDC3110Q0 15 FDC315Q01 FDC315Q0 150 FDC3150Q01 FDC3150Q0 175 FDC3175Q01 FDC3175Q0 00 FDC300Q01 FDC300Q0 Terminal Body Material Wire Type Metric Wire Range mm 1 Line and load terminal included. Two interphase barriers provided, mounted on line end of limiter, catalog number FJ1PBK. 3 Four interphase barriers provided, () line end of breaker, () load end of limiter. 4 Load side breaker terminations included for units configured with line mounted limiters. Breaker with Load Side Mounted Current Limiter 3 AWG Wire Range/ of Conductors Standard Pressure Type Terminals 50 Aluminum Cu/Al #8 350 (1) TA50FJ 4 Breaker s Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire Range Metric Wire Range mm Package of Three Terminals Standard Pressure Type Terminals 100 Steel Cu/AI 14 1/ T100FB 5 Aluminum Cu/AI 4 4/ TA5FD Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-71

157 .3 Dimensions and Weights Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Assembled Breaker and Current Limiting Module Frame Height Width Depth Weight in lbs (kg) FD + limiter 1.06 (306.3) 4.13 (104.9) 3.39 (86.1) 8.50 (3.86) FD-Frame With Current Limiter Module 4.1 (104.6) 1.06 (306.3) 4.13 (104.9) 3.96 (100.5) 3.34 (84.8) 3.39 (86.1) V4-T-7 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

158 .3 Internal Accessories Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( s) F-Frame (10 5 s) J-Frame (70 50 s) K-Frame ( s) L-Frame ( s) M-Frame ( s) N-Frame ( s) R-Frame ( s) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4)..... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories Product Selection Technical Data and Specifications External Accessories Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-75 V4-T-94 V4-T-304 Internal Accessories Product Overview Alarm Switch For remote indication of automatic trip operation. Does not function with manual switching; however, it will operate when either a shunt trip or undervoltage release is operated. A make contact closes and a break contact opens when the alarm/lockout switch operates. The switch automatically resets when the circuit breaker is reset. Auxiliary Switch The auxiliary switch provides circuit breaker contact status information by monitoring the position of the molded cross bar that contains the moving contact arms. The auxiliary switch is used for remote indication and interlock system verification, and consists of one or two SPDT switches housed in a plug-in module. Each SPDT switch has one a and one b contact. When the circuit breaker contacts are open, the a contact is open and the b contact is closed. Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Each catalog number listed in tables on Pages V4-T-78 and V4-T-79 includes one auxiliary switch and one alarm switch. In an auxiliary switch ASL switch combination, the auxiliary switch is always mounted on the side of the plug-in module next to the center pole of the circuit breaker. Shunt Trip The shunt trip provides remote controlled tripping of the circuit breaker. The shunt trip consists of an intermittent rated solenoid with a tripping plunger and a cutoff switch assembled to a plug-in module. When required for ground fault protection applications, certain AC rated shunt trips, as noted in the electrical rating table, are suitable for operation at 55 percent of rated voltage. Select shunt trip catalog number for the voltage within the indicated voltage range. Shunt trip coils are designed to be applied at specific AC or DC voltages within the voltage range shown. Electrical ratings are also shown on applicable circuit breaker accessory nameplates. Low Energy Shunt Trip Low energy shunt trip devices are designed to operate from low energy output signals from dedicated current sensors typically applied in ground fault protection schemes. However, with a proper control voltage source, they may be applied in place of conventional trip devices for special applications. Flux paths surrounding permanent magnets used in the shunt trip assembly hold a charged spring poised in readiness to operate the circuit breaker trip mechanism. When a 100 microfarad capacitor charged to 8 Vdc is discharged through the shunt trip coil, the resultant flux opposes the permanent magnet flux field, which releases the stored energy in the spring to trip the circuit breaker. As the circuit breaker resets, the shunt trip reset arm is actuated by the circuit breaker handle, resetting the shunt trip. The plug-in module is mounted in retaining slots in the top of the trip unit. Coil is intermittent-rated only. Cutoff provisions required in control circuit. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-73

159 .3 Undervoltage Release Mechanism The undervoltage release mechanism monitors a voltage (typically a line voltage) and trips the circuit breaker when the voltage falls to between 70 and 35 percent of the solenoid coil rating. The undervoltage release mechanism consists of a continuous rated solenoid with a plunger and tripping lever mounted in a plug-in module. The tab on the tripping lever resets the undervoltage release mechanism when normal voltage has been restored and the circuit breaker handle is moved to the reset (or OFF) position. With less than pickup voltage applied to the undervoltage release mechanism, the circuit breaker contacts will not touch when a closing operation is attempted. Note: Undervoltage release mechanism accessories are not designed for, and should not be used as, circuit interlocks. Accessory Terminal Block (R-Frame) (For fixed-mounted configuration.) Internal accessory wiring leads are normally supplied with pigtail leads (18 AWG) that exit from the right side of the circuit breaker. Where specified, fixed-mounted accessory terminal blocks are available. A maximum of one 4-point terminal block can be installed on the right side of the circuit breaker for the internal accessories. For convenience in determining the appropriate number of terminal block points required, refer to Page V4-T-74. PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits (OPTIM 550 only) K-, L- and N-Frames Eaton s PowerNet Communications Kit can be ordered to add PowerNet communications to an existing OPTIM 550 breaker in the field. An 18-inch (457. mm) wiring pigtail is routed to the rear of the breaker: two wires for PowerNet and two wires for 4 Vdc (45 ma load). It is recommended that the power supply be an isolated high quality unit. V4-T-74 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

160 .3 Product Selection Alarm Switch Alarm Switch Make Break G-Frame Alarm Switch (RH Only) 1 Electrical s Contact Factory Volts Frequency s Arrangement 34 Alarm Switch 40 50/60 Hz 6 1 Make/1 Break B3 188C75G03 Alarm Switch Auxiliary Switches Combination 40 50/60 Hz 6 1 Make/1 Break and 1A/1B B13 188C76G09 F-Frame Alarm Switch 1 of Contacts (Make and Break) Mounting Location (Pole) F-Frame HMCP Alarm Switch 1 Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 5 Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear 6 Opposite Side Same Side 1 Left 7 B01 B0 B03 B04 A1L1LPK A1L1LTK Right B05 B06 B07 B08 A1L1RPK A1L1RTK Left 7 B09 B10 B11 AL1LPK AL1LTK Right B1 B13 B14 AL1RPK AL1RTK 1 (Make only) Single-pole B15 8 of Contacts (Make and Break) Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 5 Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear 6 Opposite Side Same Side 1 Left 7 B01 B0 B03 B04 MA1L1LPK MA1L1LTK Right B05 B06 B07 B08 MA1L1RPK MA1L1RTK Left 7 B09 B10 B11 MAL1LPK MAL1LTK Right B1 B13 B14 MAL1RPK MAL1RTK J-Frame and HMCP (J) Alarm Switch Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 9 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block of Contacts Mounting Same Side Rear 7 Opposite Side Same Side (Make and Location Break) (Pole) 1 Left j B01 B0 B03 B04 A1LLPK A1LLTK Right B05 B06 B07 B08 A1LRPK A1LRTK 6 1 F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed; however, this is not recommended for FDE breakers. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. Includes 4-inch (609.6 mm) external pigtail leads,18 AWG ( ). 3 A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker. 4 Suitable for mounting in right pole only of two- or three-pole breaker. 5 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation. 6 Standard pigtail lead exit location. 7 Standard mounting location. 8 Factory installation only. Leads exit load end of circuit breaker. 9 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation on interchangeable trip unit breakers under E j Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-75

161 .3 K-Frame and HMCP (K) Alarm Switch Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block of Sets of Mounting Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Contacts Location (1M and 1B) (Pole) 1 Left 3 B01 B0 B03 B04 A1L3LPK A1L3LTK Right 4 B05 B06 B07 B08 A1L3RPK A1L3RTK Left 3 B09 B10 B11 AL3LPK AL3LTK Right 4 B1 B13 B14 AL3RPK AL3RTK L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Alarm Switch Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block of Sets of Mounting Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Contacts Location (1M and 1B) (Pole) 1 Left 3 B01 B0 B03 B04 A1L4LPK A1L4LTK Right B05 B06 B07 B08 A1L4RPK A1L4RTK Left 3 B09 B10 B11 AL4LPK AL4LTK Right B1 B13 B14 AL4RPK AL4RTK N-Frame and HMCP (N) Alarm Switch Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 5 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block of Sets of Mounting Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Contacts Location (1M and 1B) (Pole) 1 Left B01 B0 B03 B04 A1L5LPK A1L5LTK Right 3 B05 B06 B07 B08 A1L5RPK A1L5RTK Left B09 B10 B11 AL5LPK AL5LTK Right 3 B1 B13 B14 AL5RPK AL5RTK R-Frame Alarm Switch (RH Only) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 5 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads of Contacts (Make and Break) 6 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation on interchangeable trip unit breakers under E Standard mounting location. 3 Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. 4 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole. 5 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E A maximum of three ASL plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker. 6 1 B05 A1L6RPK B1 AL6RPK V4-T-76 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

162 .3 Auxiliary Switch Auxiliary Switch a b G-Frame Auxiliary Switch (RH Only) Electrical s Volts Frequency s F-Frame with Electronic Trip Unit Auxiliary Switch 9 1 Includes 4-inch external pigtail leads, 18 AWG ( ). A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker. Suitable for mounting in right pole only of two- or three-pole breaker. 3 Standard pigtail lead exit location. 4 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories; for field installation. 5 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). 6 Not for use on F-Frame with electronic trip unit volts (max.), 50/60 Hz switch for use in electronic circuit of 100 micro amperes and 15 Vdc minimum. 8 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers. 9 Only for use on three-pole F-Frame breakers with electronic trip unit. Installation auxiliary switch for FD electronic breakers on right pole must be performed at breaker factory. j Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation or interchangeable trip unit breakers under E k Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Contact Arrangement Factory /60 Hz 6 1a/1b A3 188C74G /60 Hz 6 a/b A6 188C73G03 F-Frame and HMCP (F) Auxiliary Switch Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 4 Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block of Mounting Same Side Rear 3 Opposite Side Same Side Contacts Location A and B (Pole) 1 Left 5 A01 A0 A03 A04 A1X1PK A1X1LTK Left 5 A15 7 A16 7 A17 7 E1X1PK Right or Neutral 6 A05 A06 A07 A08 A1X1PK A1X1RTK 8 Right or Neutral 6 A18 7 A19 7 A0 7 Left 5 A09 A10 A11 AX1LPK AX1LTK of Contacts A and B Left 5 A1 7 A 7 EX1LPK Right or Neutral 6 A1 A13 A14 AX1RPK AX1RTK 8 Right or Neutral 6 A3 7 A4 7 EX1RPK Mounting Location (Pole) Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 4 Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Trip Unit Type Right A30 A31 A3 Trip Unit Type Right A33 A34 A35 J-Frame and HMCP (J) Auxiliary Switch Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Factory Installation Kit j 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block of Mounting Same Side Rear 3 Opposite Side Same Side Contacts Location A and B (Pole) 1 Left A01 A0 A03 A04 A1XPK A1XLTK Right k A05 A06 A07 A08 A1XPK A1XRTK 4 Left A09 A10 A11 AXPK AXLTK Right k A1 A13 A14 AXPK AXRTK 4 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-77

163 .3 K-Frame and HMCP (K) Auxiliary Switch Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Factory Installation Kit 1 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block of Mounting Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Contacts Location A and B (Pole) 1 Left A01 A0 A03 A04 A1X3PK A1X3LTK Right 3 A05 A06 A07 A08 A1X3PK A1X3RTK 4 Left A09 A10 A11 AX3PK AX3LTK Right 3 A1 A13 A14 AX3PK AX3RTK 4 Right A1 A 148D8G Left A18 A15 A3X3LPK A3X3LTK Right 3 A17 A16 A3X3RPK A3X3RTK 4 L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Auxiliary Switch Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Factory Installation Kit 1 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block of Mounting Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Contacts Location A and B (Pole) 1 Left A01 A0 A03 A04 A1X4PK A1X4LTK Right A05 A06 A07 A08 A1X4PK A1X4RTK 4 Left A09 A10 A11 AX4PK AX4LTK Right A1 A13 A14 AX4PK AX4RTK 4 3 Left A18 A15 A3X4PK A3X4LTK Right A17 A16 A3X4PK A3X4RTK 4 N-Frame and HMCP (N) Auxiliary Switch Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Factory Installation Kit 1 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block of Mounting Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Contacts Location A and B (Pole) 1 Left A01 A0 A03 A04 A1X5PK A1X5LTK Right A05 A06 A07 A08 A1X5PK A1X5RTK 4 Left A09 A10 A11 AX5PK AX5LTK Right A1 A13 A14 AX5PK AX5RTK 4 3 Left A18 A15 A3X5LPK A3X5LTK Right A17 A16 A3X5RPK A3X5RTK 4 R-Frame Auxiliary Switch (RH Only) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 of 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads Contacts A and B 5 5 A1 AX6RPK 4 A19 A4X6RPK 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. 3 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole. 4 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers. 5 A maximum of two auxiliary switches (any combination of a/b or 4a/4b plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker. 6 This option is not field installable. 7 Available on the OPTIM 550 only. Communications are not available with this option. V4-T-78 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

164 .3 Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination a b F-Frame Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination 1 Mounting Location (Pole) 1 Auxiliary switch and alarm switch combination options (Cxx) are not available on FDE 310+ with LSG or LSIG trip units due to exit wire limitations. To obtain both features, order a left mounting alarm switch (B01-B04 or B09-B11), and right mounting auxiliary switch (A30-A3). Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation. 3 Standard mounting location. 4 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers 5 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation of interchangeable trip unit breakers under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. 7 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole. 8 Will not install on OPTIM Trip (RH). 9 Available on the OPTIM 550 only. Communications are not available with this option. j This option is not field installable. Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear 3 Same Side Left 3 C01 C0 C03 AAL1LPK AAL1LTK Right C04 C05 C06 AAL1RPK AAL1RTK 4 F-Frame HMCP Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Mounting Same Side Rear 3 Same Side Location (Pole) Left 4 C01 C0 C03 MAAL1LPK MAAL1LTK Right C04 C05 C06 MAAL1RPK MAAL1RPK J-Frame and HMCP (J) Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 5 of 18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Sets of Contacts Mounting Same Side Rear 6 Opposite Side Same Side (1A and 1B) Location (1M 1B) (Pole) 1 Left C01 C0 C03 AALLPK AALLTK Right 4 C04 C05 C06 AALRPK AALRTK 4 K-Frame and HMCP (K) Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 5 of 18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Sets of Contacts Mounting Same Side Rear 6 Opposite Side Same Side (1A and 1B) Location (1M 1B) (Pole) 1 Left C01 C0 C03 AAL3LPK AAL3LTK Right 67 C04 C05 C06 AAL3RPK 8 AAL3RTK Right C07 C08 148D8G09 9j Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-79

165 .3 L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block of Mounting Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Sets of Location Contacts (Pole) 1A, 1B and 1 Make/1 Break A, B and 1 Make/1 Break 3A, 3B and 1 Make/1 Break Left C01 C0 C03 AA114LPK AA114LTK Right C04 C05 C06 AA114RPK AA114RTK 3 Left C07 C08 C1 AA14LPK AA14LTK Right C10 C11 C13 AA14RPK AA14RTK 3 Left C14 AA314LPK Right C15 AA314RPK N-Frame and HMCP (N) Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457 mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block of Mounting Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Sets of Location Contacts (Pole) 1A, 1B and 1 Make/1 Break A, B and 1 Make/1 Break Left C01 C0 C03 AA115LPK AA115LTK Right C04 C05 C06 AA115RPK AA115RTK 3 Left C07 C08 C1 AA15LPK AA15LTK Right C10 C11 C13 AA15RPK AA15RTK 3 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. 3 Not for use on four-pole circuit breaker. V4-T-80 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

166 .3 Shunt Trip Shunt Trip ST a G-Frame Shunt Trip (LH Three-Pole Only) Electrical s Volts Frequency s 10 50/60 Hz 1.1 S1 1373D6G /60 Hz.1 S 1373D6G0 1 DC.8 S3 1373D6G15 4 DC 5.7 S4 1373D6G Hz S7 1373D6G0 F-Frame and HMCP (F) Shunt Trip Factory Mounted Factory Installation Kit 1 Connection Type and Location 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear 3 Opposite Side Same Side Voltage (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) 1 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). 3 Standard pigtail lead exit location Vac marked suitable for ground fault protection devices. 5 Standard mounting location. 6 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers. G-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC s 1 4 Vac or Vdc S01 S0 S03 S04 SNT1LP03K SNT1LT03K Vac or Vdc 4 S05 S06 S07 S08 SNT1LP08K SNT1LT08K Vac or Vdc S09 S10 S11 S1 SNT1LP1K SNT1LT1K Vac or 0 50 Vdc S13 S14 S15 S16 SNT1LP18K SNT1LT18K Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting AC/DC s Vac or Vdc S17 S18 S19 S0 SNT1RP03K SNT1RT03K Vac or Vdc 4 S1 S S3 S4 SNT1RP08K SNT1RT08K Vac or Vdc S5 S6 S7 S8 SNT1RP1K SNT1RT1K Vac or 0 50 Vdc S9 S30 S31 S3 SNT1RP18K SNT1RT18K 6 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-81

167 .3 J-Frame and HMCP (J) Shunt Trip Voltage (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC s K-Frame and HMCP (K) Shunt Trip 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. 3 Suitable for use with Class 1 ground fault sensing element. 4 Not for use on four-pole circuit breakers. 5 For use with KT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only. 6 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole. Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side 1 4 Vac or Vdc S41 S4 S43 S44 SNTP04K SNTT04K Vac or Vdc S49 S50 S51 S5 SNTP06K SNTT06K Vac or Vdc 3 S09 S10 S11 S1 SNTP11K SNTT11K Vac or 0 50 Vdc S13 S14 S15 S16 SNTP14K SNTT14K Vac S17 S18 S19 S0 SNTP18K SNTT18K Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting AC/DC s 1 4 Vac or Vdc S45 S46 S47 S48 SNTP04K SNTT04K Vac or Vdc S53 S54 S55 S56 SNTP06K SNTT06K Vac or Vdc 3 S9 S30 S31 S3 SNTP11K SNTT11K Vac or 0 50 Vdc S33 S34 S35 S36 SNTP14K SNTT14K Vac S37 S38 S39 S40 SNTP18K SNTT18K 4 Voltage (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC s 1 4 Vac or Vdc S41 S4 S43 S44 SNT3P04K SNT3T04K Vac or Vdc S49 S50 S51 S5 SNT3P06K SNT3T06K Vac or Vdc 3 S09 S10 S11 S1 SNT3P11K SNT3T11K Vac or 0 50 Vdc S13 S14 S15 S16 SNT3P14K SNT3T14K Vac S17 S18 S19 S0 SNT3P18K SNT3T18K Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting AC/DC s Vac or Vdc S45 S46 S47 S48 SNT3P04K SNT3T04K Vac or Vdc S53 S54 S55 S56 SNT3P06K SNT3T06K Vac or Vdc 3 S9 S30 S31 S3 SNT3P11K SNT3T11K Vac or 0 50 Vdc S33 S34 S35 S36 SNT3P14K SNT3T14K Vac S37 S38 S39 S40 SNT3P18K SNT3T18K 4 V4-T-8 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

168 .3 L-, HMCP (L) and (M) Frames and Shunt Trip Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Voltage (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. 3 For use with LT (thermal-magnetic) three-pole trip units only. Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC s 1 4 Vac or Vdc S01 S0 S03 S04 SNT4LP03K SNT4LT03K Vac S05 S06 S07 S08 SNT4LP05K SNT4LT05K Vdc S85 S86 S87 SNT4LP3K SNT4LT3K Vac S09 S10 S11 S1 SNT4LP11K SNT4LT11K Vdc S41 S4 S43 S44 SNT4LP6K SNT4LT6K Vac or 0 50 Vdc S13 S14 S15 S16 SNT4LP14K SNT4LT14K Vac S17 S18 S19 S0 SNT4LP18K SNT4LT18K Right-Pole Mounting AC/DC s Vac or Vdc S1 S S3 S4 SNT4RP03K SNT4RT03K Vac S5 S6 S7 S8 SNT4RP05K SNT4RT05K Vdc S88 S89 S90 SNT4RP3K SNT4RT3K Vac S9 S30 S31 S3 SNT4RP11K SNT4RT11K Vdc S45 S46 S47 S48 SNT4RP6K SNT4RT6K Vac or 0 50 Vdc S33 S34 S35 S36 SNT4RP14K SNT4RT14K Vac S37 S38 S39 S40 SNT4RP18K SNT4RT18K Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-83

169 .3 N-Frame and HMCP (N) Shunt Trip Voltage (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) R-Frame Shunt Trip (RH Only) 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. 3 Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits. 4 A maximum of two shunt trip plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker. Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Left-Pole Mounting AC/DC s 9 4 Vac or Vdc S01 S0 S03 S04 SNT5LP03K SNT5LT03K Vac S05 S06 S07 S08 SNT5LP05K SNT5LT05K Vac 3 S09 S10 S11 S1 SNT5LP11K SNT5LT11K Vdc S41 S4 S43 S44 SNT5LP6K SNT5LT6K Vac or 0 50 Vdc S13 S14 S15 S16 SNT5LP14K SNT5LT14K Vac S17 S18 S19 S0 SNT5LP18K SNT5LT18K Vdc S1 S S3 S4 SNT5LP3K SNT5LT3K Voltage (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads Vac or Vdc S1 SNT6P03K Vac S5 SNT6P05K Vac S9 SNT6P11K Vac or 0 50 Vdc S33 SNT6P14K Vac S37 SNT6P18K Vdc S88 SNT6P3K Vdc S45 SNT6P6K V4-T-84 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

170 .3 Low Energy Shunt Trip Ordering Information Select shunt trip catalog number for the voltage within the indicated voltage range. Shunt trip coils are designed to be applied at specific AC or DC voltages within the voltage range shown. Electrical ratings are also shown on applicable circuit breaker accessory nameplates. Low Energy Shunt Trip UV F-, J-, K-, L-, M-, N- and R-Frames and HMCPs Low Energy Shunt Trip 1 Mounting Positions (Pole) Same Side Rear 3 Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Opposite F-Frame Left NO1 NO NO3 NO4 LST1LPK 4 LST1LTK 4 Right 3 NO5 NO6 NO7 NO8 LST1RPK 4 LST1RTK 4 J-Frame Left NO1 NO NO3 LSTLPK Right 3 NO5 NO6 NO7 LSTRPK K-Frame Left 3 NO1 NO NO3 LST3LPK Right 56 NO5 NO6 NO7 LST3RPK L- and M-Frames Left NO1 NO NO3 LST4LPK Right NO5 NO6 NO7 LST4RPK N-Frame Left 3 NO1 NO NO3 LST5LPK R-Frame Right NO1 LST6RPK 1 Cutoff provisions required in control circuit. Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. 4 For F-Frame HMCP, add an M to beginning of catalog number. Field Installation Kit referenced for factory use only, not UL listed for field installation. 5 For use with thermal-magnetic trip units only. 6 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-85

171 .3 Undervoltage Release Mechanism Ordering Information Select handle reset undervoltage release mechanism catalog number for the voltage within the indicated voltage range. Undervoltage release mechanism coils are designed to be applied at specific AC or DC voltages within the voltage range shown on applicable circuit breaker accessory nameplates. Undervoltage Release Mechanism UV G-Frame Undervoltage Release Mechanism (LH Three-Pole Only) Electrical s Factory Volts (AC Only) Frequency (Hz) s Style s / D6G03 T1 4 50/ D6G04 T 48 50/ D6G05 T / D6G06 T D6G07 T D6G08 T D6G09 T / D6G10 T D6G11 T D6G1 T D6G13 T D6G14 T1 1 Includes 4-inch (609.6 mm) external pigtail leads, 18 AWG ( ). A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker. 3 Suitable for mounting in left pole only of three-pole breaker. G-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. V4-T-86 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

172 .3 F-Frame Factory Mounted (For F-Frame Breaker and F-Frame HMCP) Undervoltage Release Mechanism Connection Type and Location 18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear 1 Opposite Side Same Side Voltage (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) Left-Pole Mounting AC s 1 Vac U01 U0 U03 U04 4 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08 48 Vac U37 U38 U39 U40 60 Vac U97 U98 U99 U Vac U13 U14 U15 U Vac U17 U18 U19 U Vac U1 U U3 U Vac U5 U6 U7 U8 Right-Pole Mounting AC s 3 1 Vac U49 U50 U51 U5 4 Vac U53 U54 U55 U56 48 Vac U85 U86 U87 U88 60 Vac U101 U10 U103 U Vac U61 U6 U63 U Vac U65 U66 U67 U Vac U69 U70 U71 U Vac U73 U74 U75 U76 Left-Pole Mounting DC s 1 Vdc U9 U30 U31 U3 4 Vdc U33 U34 U35 U36 48 Vdc U37 U38 U39 U40 60 Vdc U97 U98 U99 U Vdc U41 U4 U43 U Vdc U45 U46 U47 U48 Right-Pole Mounting DC s 3 1 Vdc U77 U78 U79 U80 4 Vdc U81 U8 U83 U84 48 Vdc U85 U86 U87 U88 60 Vdc U101 U10 U103 U Vdc U89 U90 U91 U Vdc U93 U94 U95 U96 1 Standard pigtail lead exit location. Standard mounting location. 3 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker. F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are UL listed for factory installation under E7819. Where local codes and standards permit and UL listing is not required, internal accessories can be field installed. Accessory installation should be done before the circuit breaker is mounted and connected. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-87

173 .3 F-Frame Field Mounted Undervoltage Release Mechanism F-Frame Breaker F-Frame Breaker HMCP Factory Installation Kits 1 Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Voltage (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) 1 Not listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation. Standard mounting location. 3 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker. Left-Pole Mounting AC s 1 Vac UVH1LP0K UVH1LT0K MUVH1LP0K MUVH1LT0K 4 Vac UVH1LP03K UVH1LT03K MUVH1LP03K MUVH1LT03K 48 Vac UVH1LPK UVH1LTK MUVH1LPK MUVH1LTK 60 Vac UVH1LP4K UVH1LT4K MUVH1LP4K MUVH1LT4K Vac UVH1LP08K UVH1LT08K MUVH1LP08K MUVH1LT08K Vac UVH1LP11K UVH1LT11K MUVH1LP11K MUVH1LT11K Vac UVH1LP15K UVH1LT15K MUVH1LP15K MUVH1LT15K Vac UVH1LP18K UVH1LT18K MUVH1LP18K MUVH1LT18K Right-Pole Mounting AC s 3 1 Vac UVH1RP0K UVH1RT0K MUVH1RP0K MUVH1RT0K 4 Vac UVH1RP03K UVH1RT03K MUVH1RP03K MUVH1RT03K 48 Vac UVH1RPK UVH1RTK MUVH1RPK MUVH1RTK 60 Vac UVH1RP4K UVH1RT4K MUVH1RP4K MUVH1RT4K Vac UVH1RP08K UVH1RT08K MUVH1RP08K MUVH1RT08K Vac UVH1RP11K UVH1RT11K MUVH1RP11K MUVH1RT11K Vac UVH1RP15K UVH1RT15K MUVH1RP15K MUVH1RT15K Vac UVH1RP18K UVH1RT18K MUVH1RP18K MUVH1RT18K Left-Pole Mounting DC s 1 Vdc UVH1LP0K UVH1LT0K MUVH1LP0K MUVH1LT0K 4 Vdc UVH1LP1K UVH1LT1K MUVH1LP1K MUVH1LT1K 48 Vdc UVH1LPK UVH1LTK MUVH1LPK MUVH1LTK 60 Vdc UVH1LP4K UVH1LT4K MUVH1LP4K MUVH1LT4K Vdc UVH1LP6K UVH1LT6K MUVH1LP6K MUVH1LT6K 0 50 Vdc UVH1LP8K UVH1LT8K MUVH1LP8K MUVH1LT8K Right-Pole Mounting DC s 3 1 Vdc UVH1RP0K UVH1RT0K MUVH1RP0K MUVH1RT0K 4 Vdc UVH1RP1K UVH1RT1K MUVH1RP1K MUVH1RT1K 48 Vdc UVH1RPK UVH1RTK MUVH1RPK MUVH1RTK 60 Vdc UVH1RPK UVH1RTK MUVH1RPK MUVH1RTK Vdc UVH1RP6K UVH1RT6K MUVH1RP6K MUVH1RT6K 0 50 Vdc UVH1RP8K UVH1RT8K MUVH1RP8K MUVH1RT8K V4-T-88 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

174 .3 Block 1 J-Frame and HMCP (J) Undervoltage Release Mechanism Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits Terminal 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block 3 Voltage (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) 1 For electrical rating data for manual, automatic and electrical reset undervoltage release mechanisms, refer to Eaton. Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breakers. 4 Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. Left-Pole Mounting AC s 4 1 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08 UVHLP0K UVHLT0K 4 Vac U09 U10 U11 U1 UVHLP03K UVHLT03K Vac U13 U14 U15 U16 UVHLP05K UVHLT05K Vac U17 U18 U19 U0 UVHLP08K UVHLT08K Vac U1 U U3 U4 UVHLP11K UVHLT11K Vac U5 U6 U7 U8 UVHLP15K UVHLT15K Right-Pole Mounting AC s 3 1 Vac U37 U38 U39 U40 UVHRP0K UVHRT0K 4 Vac U41 U4 U43 U44 UVHRP03K UVHRT03K Vac U45 U46 U47 U48 UVHRP05K UVHRT05K Vac U49 U50 U51 U5 UVHRP08K UVHRT08K Vac U53 U54 U55 U56 UVHRP11K UVHRT11K Vac U57 U58 U59 U60 UVHRP15K UVHRT15K Left-Pole Mounting DC s 4 1 Vdc T01 T0 T03 T04 UVHLP0K UVHLT0K 4 Vdc T05 T06 T07 T08 UVHLP1K UVHLT1K Vdc T09 T10 T11 T1 UVHLP3K UVHLT3K Vdc T13 T14 T15 T16 UVHLP6K UVHLT6K 0 50 Vdc T17 T18 T19 T0 UVHLP8K UVHLT8K Right-Pole Mounting DC s 3 1 Vdc T1 T T3 T4 UVHRP0K UVHRT0K 4 Vdc T5 T6 T7 T8 UVHRP1K UVHRT1K Vdc T9 T30 T31 T3 UVHRP3K UVHRT3K Vdc T33 T34 T35 T36 UVHRP6K UVHRT6K 0 50 Vdc T37 T38 T39 T40 UVHRP8K UVHRT8K Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-89

175 .3 K-Frame and HMCP (K) Undervoltage Release Mechanism Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 Terminal 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Voltage (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) Left-Pole Mounting AC s 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories, for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. 3 For use with KT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only. 4 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker. 5 Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole. 1 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08 UVH3LP0K UVH3LT0K 4 Vac U09 U10 U11 U1 UVH3LP03K UVH3LT03K Vac U13 U14 U15 U16 UVH3LP05K UVH3LT05K Vac U17 U18 U19 U0 UVH3LP08K UVH3LT08K Vac U1 U U3 U4 UVH3LP11K UVH3LT11K Vac U5 U6 U7 U8 UVH3LP15K UVH3LT15K Right-Pole Mounting AC s Vac U37 U38 U39 U40 UVH3RP0K UVH3RT0K 4 Vac U41 U4 U43 U44 UVH3RP03K UVH3RT03K Vac U45 U46 U47 U48 UVH3RP05K UVH3RT05K Vac U49 U50 U51 U5 UVH3RP08K UVH3RT08K Vac U53 U54 U55 U56 UVH3RP11K UVH3RT11K Vac U57 U58 U59 U60 UVH3RP15K UVH3RT15K Left-Pole Mounting DC s 1 Vdc T01 T0 T03 T04 UVH3LP0K UVH3LT0K 4 Vdc T05 T06 T07 T08 UVH3LP1K UVH3LT1K Vdc T09 T10 T11 T1 UVH3LP3K UVH3LT3K Vdc T13 T14 T15 T16 UVH3LP6K UVH3LT6K 0 50 Vdc T17 T18 T19 T0 UVH3LP8K UVH3LT8K Right-Pole Mounting DC s Vdc T1 T T3 T4 UVH3RP0K UVH3RT0K 4 Vdc T5 T6 T7 T8 UVH3RP1K UVH3RT1K Vdc T9 T30 T31 T3 UVH3RP3K UVH3RT3K Vdc T33 T34 T35 T36 UVH3RP6K UVH3RT6K 0 50 Vdc T37 T38 T39 T40 UVH3RP8K UVH3RT8K V4-T-90 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

176 .3 L-, HMCP (L) and (M)-Frames and Undervoltage Release Mechanism Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 Terminal 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Voltage (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. 3 For use with LT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only. 4 Not for use on right pole of four-pole circuit breaker. Left-Pole Mounting AC s 1 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08 UVH4LP0K UVH4LT0K 4 Vac U09 U10 U11 U1 UVH4LP03K UVH4LT03K Vac U13 U14 U15 U16 UVH4LP05K UVH4LT05K Vac U17 U18 U19 U0 UVH4LP08K UVH4LT08K Vac U1 U U3 U4 UVH4LP11K UVH4LT11K Vac U5 U6 U7 U8 UVH4LP15K UVH4LT15K Right-Pole Mounting AC s 34 1 Vac U37 U38 U39 U40 UVH4RP0K UVH4RT0K 4 Vac U41 U4 U43 U44 UVH4RP03K UVH4RT03K Vac U45 U46 U47 U48 UVH4RP05K UVH4RT05K Vac U49 U50 U51 U5 UVH4RP08K UVH4RT08K Vac U53 U54 U55 U56 UVH4RP11K UVH4RT11K Vac U57 U58 U59 U60 UVH4RP15K UVH4RT15K Left-Pole Mounting DC s 1 Vdc T01 T0 T03 T04 UVH4LP0K UVH4LT0K 4 Vdc T05 T06 T07 T08 UVH4LP1K UVH4LT1K Vdc T09 T10 T11 T1 UVH4LP3K UVH4LT3K Vdc T13 T14 T15 T16 UVH4LP6K UVH4LT6K 0 50 Vdc T17 T18 T19 T0 UVH4LP8K UVH4LT8K Right-Pole Mounting DC s 34 1 Vdc T1 T T3 T4 UVH4RP0K UVH4RT0K 4 Vdc T5 T6 T7 T8 UVH4RP1K UVH4RT1K Vdc T9 T30 T31 T3 UVH4RP3K UVH4RT3K Vdc T33 T34 T35 T36 UVH4RP6K UVH4RT6K 0 50 Vdc T37 T38 T39 T40 UVH4RP8K UVH4RT8K Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-91

177 .3 N-Frame and HMCP (N) Undervoltage Release Mechanism Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 1 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Same Side Rear Opposite Side Same Side Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Voltage (AC Freq. = 50/60 Hz) R-Frame Undervoltage Release Mechanism (RH only) Factory Mounted Field Mounted Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits 3 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads 1 Listed with Underwriters Laboratories for field installation under E Standard mounting location leads exit rear of breaker. 3 Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 500 mechanical operations. 4 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Leads are orange and brown. Left-Pole Mounting AC s 1 Vac U05 U06 U07 U08 UVH5LP0K UVH5LT0K 4 Vac U09 U10 U11 U1 UVH5LP03K UVH5LT03K Vac U13 U14 U15 U16 UVH5LP05K UVH5LT05K Vac U17 U18 U19 U0 UVH5LP08K UVH5LT08K Vac U1 U U3 U4 UVH5LP11K UVH5LT11K Vac U5 U6 U7 U8 UVH5LP9K UVH5LT9K Left-Pole Mounting DC s 1 Vdc T01 T0 T03 T04 UVH5LP0K UVH5LT0K 4 Vdc T05 T06 T07 T08 UVH5LP1K UVH5LT1K Vdc T09 T10 T11 T1 UVH5LP3K UVH5LT3K Vdc T13 T14 T15 T16 UVH5LP6K UVH5LT6K 0 50 Vdc T17 T18 T19 T0 UVH5LP8K UVH5LT8K Voltage (AC Frequency = 50/60 Hz) Vac U37 UVH6RP0K 4 Vac U41 UVH6RP03K Vac U45 UVH6RP05K Vac U49 UVH6RP08K Vac U53 UVH6RP11K Vac U57 UVH6RP9K 1 Vdc T1 UVH6RP0K 4 Vdc T5 UVH6RP1K Vdc T9 UVH6RP3K Vdc T33 UVH6RP6K 0 50 Vdc T37 UVH6RP8K V4-T-9 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

178 .3 Accessory Terminal Block (R-Frame) Accessory Terminal Block (R-Frame) R-Frame Accessory Terminal Block 1 Factory Installed Q01 of Control Wires for Each Internally Mounted Accessory Type of Accessory Auxiliary switch Alarm (Signal)/ Lockout switch PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits (OPTIM 550 Only) K-, L- and N-Frames PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits PowerNet Interlock Kit Field Mounted TBRDK of Contacts per Single Accessory a/b 4a/4b 1m/1b m/b Shunt trip N/A Low energy shunt N/A Undervoltage release mechanism N/A Circuit Breaker Factory Install Required of Wires 1 One 4-point accessory terminal block provided with circuit breaker when ordered factory installed or shipped from warehouse as separate item when ordered for field installation. See Digitrip RMS master connection diagram (IL 9C714). Installation of these kits restrict any other attachments from being installed in the RH pole. 3 Includes a ground fault alarm signal that can drive the ground fault alarm unit (catalog number GFAU) K-Frame PN ICK550K L-Frame PN ICK550L N-Frame PN ICK550N Zone Interlock/Ground Kit 3 Circuit Factory Install Breaker K-Frame ZG ZGK550K L-Frame ZG ZGK550L N-Frame ZG ZGK550N PowerNet and Zone Interlock/Ground Kit 3 Circuit Factory Install Breaker K-Frame ZGP ZGPK550K L-Frame ZGP ZGPK550L N-Frame ZGP ZGPK550N Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-93

179 .3 Technical Data and Specifications Alarm Switch F-Frame Electrical Data 1 Voltage Frequency J-Frame Electrical Data 56 Current s Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers /60 Hz DC DC Single-Pole Circuit Breakers 15/50 50/60 Hz DC DC Voltage Frequency Current s /60 Hz DC DC K-Frame Electrical Data 67 Voltage Frequency Current s /60 Hz DC DC Dielectric Withstand Voltage Dielectric Withstand Voltage Dielectric Withstand Voltage L- and M-Frames Electrical Data 67 Voltage Frequency N-Frame Electrical Data 8 R-Frame Electrical Data 9j Current s /60 Hz DC DC Voltage Frequency Current s /60 Hz DC DC Voltage Frequency Current s /60 Hz DC DC Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations. Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 000 mechanical operations. 3 Non-inductive load. 4 Inductive (L/R = 0.06). 5 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 000 mechanical operations. 6 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). 7 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. 8 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. i Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 500 mechanical operations. j Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Leads are red, black and blue. Dielectric Withstand Voltage Dielectric Withstand Voltage Dielectric Withstand Voltage V4-T-94 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

180 .3 Auxiliary Switch F-Frame Electrical Data 1 Voltage Frequency Current s /60 Hz /60 Hz DC DC J-Frame Electrical Data 1 Voltage Frequency Current s /60 Hz DC DC K-Frame Electrical Data 5 Voltage Frequency Current s /60 Hz DC DC Dielectric Withstand Voltage Dielectric Withstand Voltage Dielectric Withstand Voltage L- and M-Frames Electrical Data Voltage Frequency Current s /60 Hz DC DC N-Frame Electrical Data 6 Voltage Frequency Current s /60 Hz DC DC R-Frame Electrical Data 78 Voltage Frequency /60 Hz 6 15 DC DC Current s 1 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). 3 For use in electronic circuit of 100 micro amperes and 15 Vdc minimum. 4 Non-inductive load. 5 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. 6 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. 7 Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 500 mechanical operations. 8 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Leads are red, black and blue. Dielectric Withstand Voltage Dielectric Withstand Voltage Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-95

181 .3 Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination F-Frame Electrical Data 1 Voltage Frequency J-Frame Electrical Data 4 Current s /60 Hz DC DC Voltage Frequency Current s /60 Hz DC DC K-Frame Electrical Data 5 Voltage Frequency Current s /60 Hz DC DC Dielectric Withstand Voltage Dielectric Withstand Voltage Dielectric Withstand Voltage L- and M-Frames Electrical Data 5 Voltage Frequency Current s /60 Hz DC DC N-Frame Electrical Data 6 Voltage Frequency Current s /60 Hz DC DC Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). 3 Non-inductive load. 4 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 000 mechanical operations. 5 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. 6 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. Dielectric Withstand Voltage Dielectric Withstand Voltage V4-T-96 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

182 .3 Shunt Trip F-Frame Electrical Data 13 50/60 Hz DC Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA Supply Voltage J-Frame Electrical Data 14 Minimum Operating Voltage /60 Hz DC Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA VA K-Frame Electrical Data /60 Hz DC Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage Average unlatching time: 6 milliseconds. Average circuit breaker contact total opening time: 18 milliseconds. 3 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations. 4 Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 000 mechanical operations. 5 Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits. 6 Approximate unlatching time: 6 milliseconds. 7 Approximate total circuit breaker contact opening time: 8 milliseconds. 8 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. VA Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-97

183 .3 L- and M-Frame Electrical Data 13 N-Frame Electrical Data 15 50/60 Hz DC 50/60 Hz DC Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage VA Supply Voltage Minimum Operating Voltage Approximate unlatching time: 6 milliseconds. Approximate total circuit breaker contact opening time: 18 milliseconds. 3 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. 4 Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits. 5 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. VA V4-T-98 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

184 .3 R-Frame Electrical Data Application s Electrical Operating s Voltage (V) Frequency (Hz) Supply Voltage (V) 1 Approximate unlatching time of 6 milliseconds. Average circuit breaker contact total opening time approximately 6 milliseconds, at rated voltage. 3 Endurance: 500 electrical operations and 500 mechanical operations. 4 Shunt trip can be operated up to a maximum of six times per minute. 5 operating voltage 110% of maximum voltage range rating. 6 Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Leads are yellow and white. Minimum Operating Voltage (V) I p (A) I rms at 0.50s (A) I rms at 0.033s (A) VA 03/03K 4 50/ DC /05K / / /11K / / / / / / /14K / / / DC DC /18K / / / / /3K DC DC /6K DC DC DC One Minute Dielectric Withstand Voltage (V) Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-99

185 .3 Undervoltage Release Mechanism F-Frame Electrical Data 1 50/60 Hz DC Supply Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Supply Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Voltage Minimum VA Voltage Minimum J-Frame Electrical Data 3 50/60 Hz DC Supply Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Supply Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Voltage Minimum VA Voltage Minimum Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations. Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 000 mechanical operations. 3 For electrical rating data for manual, automatic and electrical reset undervoltage release mechanisms, refer to Eaton. VA VA V4-T-300 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

186 .3 K-Frame Electrical Data 1 50/60 Hz DC Supply Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Supply Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Voltage Minimum VA Voltage Minimum L- and M-Frames Electrical Data 1 50/60 Hz DC Supply Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Supply Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Voltage Minimum VA Voltage Minimum Note 1 Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. VA VA Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-301

187 .3 N-Frame Electrical Data 1 50/60 Hz DC Supply Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Supply Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage Voltage Minimum VA Voltage Minimum Note 1 Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations. VA V4-T-30 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

188 .3 R-Frame AC Undervoltage Release Mechanism (Handle Reset) s 1 Application s Electrical Operating s Approximate Operating Time (ms) Supply Dropout Voltage (V) Pickup Minimum Initiation Voltage Voltage Voltage UVR Circuit Breaker (V) (V) Minimum (V) Max. VA Response 3 Contact Separation 4 1 Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 500 mechanical operations. Pigtail wire size: 18 AWG (0.8 mm ). Leads are orange and brown. 3 UVR will override a momentary voltage dip up to the response time shown. 4 Unlatching occurs 1 millisecond before circuit breaker contacts begin to separate. 5 For 1 minute. Circuit Breaker Contact Opening 0/0K /03K /05K /08K /11K /9K R-Frame DC Undervoltage Release Mechanism (Handle Reset) s 1 Application s Electrical Operating s Approximate Operating Time (ms) Supply Dropout Voltage (V) Pickup Minimum Initiation Voltage Voltage Voltage UVR Circuit Breaker (V) (V) Minimum (V) Max. VA Response 3 Contact Separation 4 Circuit Breaker Contact Opening 0/0K /1K /3K /6K /8K Dielectric Withstand Voltage (V) 5 Dielectric Withstand Voltage (V) 5 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-303

189 .3 External Accessories Contents Description Product Overview Standards and Certifications Quick Reference G-Frame ( s) F-Frame (10 5 s) J-Frame (70 50 s) K-Frame ( s) L-Frame ( s) M-Frame ( s) N-Frame ( s) R-Frame ( s) Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB) Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0 4)..... Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Module Internal Accessories External Accessories Product Selection Accessories Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions Page V4-T-116 V4-T-117 V4-T-118 V4-T-11 V4-T-135 V4-T-153 V4-T-161 V4-T-185 V4-T-11 V4-T- V4-T-37 V4-T-56 V4-T-67 V4-T-69 V4-T-70 V4-T-73 V4-T-308 V4-T-36 V4-T-37 V4-T-38 External Accessories Product Overview End Cap Kit The end cap kit slides onto the line or load conductor of the circuit breaker and acts as a threaded adapter for the conductor to accept a ring terminal or other bolt-on connector. The end cap kit is available with English and metric thread sizes. (Field installation only.) Listed per UL File E7819. Keeper Nut The keeper nut slides onto the line or load conductor of the circuit breaker and acts as a threaded adapter for the conductor to accept a ring terminal or other bolt-on connector. The keeper nut is available with English and metric thread sizes. Screws and washers are supplied by customer. (Field installation only.) Listed per UL File E7819. L-, M-, N-Frames Not required. Terminals are threaded. J-Frame Plug Nut The plug nut is used in applications where screwconnected ring-type terminals are preferred to connect cables to circuit breaker conductors. The plug nut is press-fit into the opening in the circuit breaker terminal conductor. Screws and washers are supplied by customer. Terminal Adapter Control Wire Terminal Kit The control wire terminal kit provides a means to tap off control power from a main disconnect, using the provided male end of a quick disconnect. For use with steel or stainless steel terminals only. Note: Terminal Kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. Multiwire Connectors Eaton s field-installed multiwire connectors for the load side (OFF) end terminals are used to distribute the load from the circuit breaker to multiple devices without the use of separate distribution terminal blocks. Multiwire lug kits include mounting hardware, insulators and tin-plated aluminum connectors to replace three mechanical load lugs. UL listed as used on the load side (OFF) end. Terminal Shields Terminal shields provide protection against accidental contact with live line side terminations. Terminal shields are fabricated from high dielectric insulating material and fasten over the front terminal access openings. Small openings in the shields provide limited access to the terminals for tightening connectors. (Field installation only.) Rear Fed Terminals. Rear fed terminals allow the cable to connect to the breaker from the back instead of the top. Terminal shields or interphase barriers are included with each rear fed terminal kit (depending on frame size). When catalog number starts with a 3, it indicates a kit with three terminals in each kit. number beginning with a TA indicates one terminal. V4-T-304 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

190 .3 Terminal End Covers The terminal end covers are designed for use in motor control center applications where, because of confined spaces, line side conductors are normally custom fitted. The molded end covers are made of high dielectric glasspolyester and slide over the line ends of the circuit breaker. Close fitting conductor openings are molded into the end covers. The end cover and circuit breaker case fit together to form terminal compartments that isolate discharged ionizing gases during circuit breaker tripping. Terminal end covers are available with two conductor opening diameters, 0.5-inch (6.4 mm) and inch (10.4 mm), and are listed per UL File E7819. (Field installation only.) Interphase Barriers The interphase barriers provide additional electrical clearance between circuit breaker poles for special termination applications. The barriers are high dielectric insulating plates that are installed in the molded slots between the terminals. (Field installation only.) Two per package. Base Mounting Plate Suitable for mounting six single-pole circuit breakers. DIN Rail Adapter For use with standard 35 mm DIN rail such as, 35 x 7.5 or 35 x 15 mm per DIN EN500. Adapter mounting screws included are for use with twoand three-pole circuit breakers. Adapters for singlepole circuit breakers clip into the base molding. Key Operated Attachment Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable) Non-Padlockable Handle Block The non-padlockable handle block secures the circuit breaker handle in either the ON or OFF position. (Trip-free operation allows the circuit breaker to trip when the handle block holds the circuit breaker handle in the ON position.) The device is positioned over the circuit breaker handle and secured by a setscrew to deter accidental operation of the circuit breaker handle. Listed per UL File E7819. (Field installation only.) Padlockable Handle Padlockable Handle Lock The device is positioned in the cover opening to prevent handle movement. Will accommodate one 5/16-inch (8 mm) padlock. Snap-on Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp The snap-on padlockable handle lock allows the handle to be locked in the OFF or ON position. (Trip-free operation allows the circuit breaker to trip when the handle lock holds the circuit breaker handle in the ON position.) This device was designed for use on the single-pole circuit breaker, but may be used on one-, two-, threeand four-pole styles. The handle lock snaps onto the escutcheon area of the handle with an optional retaining screw for added secureness. The handle lock will accommodate one padlock with a 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) shackle. Listed per UL File E7819. (Field installation only.) Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp The padlockable handle lock hasp allows the handle to be locked in the ON or OFF position. (Trip-free operation allows the circuit breaker to trip when the handle lock holds the circuit breaker handle in the ON position.) The hasp mounts on the circuit breaker cover within the trimline. The cover is predrilled on both sides of the operating handle so that the hasp can be mounted on either side of the handle. The hasp will accommodate up to three padlocks with 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) shackles, one per circuit breaker. Listed per UL File E7819. (Field installation only.) Cylinder Lock The cylinder lock internally blocks the trip bar in the tripped position to prevent the circuit breaker from being switched to ON. The cylinder lock is factory installed in the left pole only of the circuit breaker cover. Other internally mounted accessories cannot be installed in the same pole as the cylinder lock. (Factory installation only.) Key Interlock Kit (Lock Not Included) The key interlock is used to externally lock the circuit breaker handle in the OFF position. When the key interlock is locked, an extended deadbolt blocks movement of the circuit breaker handle. Uniquely coded keys are removable only with the deadbolt extended. Each coded key controls a group of circuit breakers for a given specific customer installation. The key interlock assembly is Underwriters Laboratories listed for field installation under UL File E7819 and consists of a mounting kit and a purchaser supplied deadbolt lock. The mounting kit comprises a mounting plate, which is secured to the circuit breaker cover in either the left- or right-pole position, key interlock mounting screws, and a wire seal. Specific mounting kits are required for individual key interlock types. Sliding Bar Interlock The sliding bar interlock provides mechanical interlocking between two adjacent three-pole circuit breakers. It is installed on the enclosure cover between the circuit breakers. When the sliding bar interlock handle is moved from one side to the other, a bar extends to alternately block movement of the circuit breaker handles and prevents both circuit breakers from being switched to ON at the same time. Sliding bar interlocks are not UL listed. (Field installation only.) Walking Beam Interlock The walking beam Interlock provides mechanical interlocking between two adjacent circuit breakers of the same pole configuration. The walking beam interlock mounts on a bracket behind and between the circuit breakers. A plunger on each end of the beam is inserted through an access hole in the back plate and base of each circuit breaker. The walking beam interlock prevents both circuit breakers from being switched ON at the same time. If a walking beam interlock is installed, the wiring troughs in the back of the circuit breaker case are blocked by the plungers and cannot be used for cross wiring. Factory modified circuit breakers are required for this application. UL File E Electrical Operator The electrical (solenoid) operator is a single solenoid mechanism that enables local and remote circuit breaker ON, OFF, and reset switching. The electrical operator is mounted on the circuit breaker cover within the trimline of the circuit breaker. The electrical operator uses a unique bi-stable latch that allows the device to operate using one solenoid. The accessory provides high-speed switching with a maximum operating time of 5 cycles (80 ms), making it suitable for generator synchronizing applications. Means are provided for remote electrical operation and for local manual operation. A special slide includes provisions for padlocking the circuit breaker handle in the OFF position. The slide will accept three padlock shackles with a maximum diameter of 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) each. An interlock electrically disconnects the solenoid when the electrical operator cover is removed. The rating data tables provide electrical rating data for the electrical (solenoid) operator. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-305

191 .3 The electrical (motor) operator allows the circuit s breaker to be opened, closed or reset remotely. It also has a lock-off capability and provisions for manual operation. The electrical (motor) operator contains a reversible motor connected to a ball screw. The ball screw drives the circuit breaker handle. Limit switches and relays are used to control the motor. Plug-In Adapters Plug-in adapters simplify installation and front removal of circuit breakers. Individual line and load plug-in adapters are available for rear connection applications on two-, three-, and four-pole circuit breakers. Common mounting plates for lineand load-end adapters are available. One plug-in adapter kit is required for line-end and one for load-end. Plug-in adapters are UL approved unless otherwise noted. Rear Connecting Studs Rear connecting studs are available in several sizes to accommodate specific fixedmounted circuit breaker applications. Each rear connecting stud assembly consists of one stud and one tube. To maintain proper clearances between poles, select alternate long and short stud assemblies for circuit breakers with more than one pole. One assembly is required for line-end and one for load-end of each pole. Tubes must be ordered separately. Connecting studs are available only with English thread sizes. Note: Not UL listed. Panelboard Connecting Straps Panelboard connecting straps are used to connect the circuit breaker terminals to the panelboard bus. The panelboard connecting straps are available with various ratings for outside and center poles. (Field installation only.) Panelboard connecting straps are available to meet the needs of most standard panelboard applications. Style numbers for mounting brackets for CDP panelboard installations are also included. Note: Not UL listed. Refer to panelboard manufacturer for compatibility. Type LFD Current Limiter The LFD current limiter is an accessory that bolts to the load end of a standard FDB or FD thermal-magnetic circuit breaker, providing 00,000 A interrupting capacity at up to 600 Vac. LFD current limiters for thermal-magnetic and electronic circuit breakers are listed with Underwriters Laboratories under File E4739. Ground Fault Alarm Unit The ground fault alarm unit is a remotely mounted device with a combination indicating light/test button that will light when the breaker trips or alarms on ground fault. The ground fault alarm unit requires a separate 10 Vac power source to power the light and the internal relay, which has 1NO and 1NC contacts for remote indication. The ground fault alarm unit can be panel mounted for ordering with an optional face mounting bracket. For use on Digitrip 310 only, K- through N- Frame. IQ Energy Sentinel The IQ Energy Sentinel is a highly accurate, microprocessor-based, breaker-mounted device designed to monitor power and energy readings. It represents an alternative to watt meters, watt-hour meters, and watt demand meters. Key advantages include savings in space, lower installation costs, and remote monitoring capability. The IQ Energy Sentinel mounts on the load side of a F-Frame (150 ampere) circuit breaker. It can be applied on threephase, four-wire systems, or single-phase, three-wire systems with voltage connected through Phases A and C. For more information, see Descriptive Bulletin Potential Transformer Module The potential transformer module is required for the Digitrip OPTIM 1050 to provide a voltage input to allow the trip unit to monitor power and energy as well as power factor. The potential transformer module is a 6 VA transformer with a primary voltage input of up to 600 volt line to line. Three 0.1 ampere fuses are provided on the primary of the transformer and can be used for isolation purposes during dielectric testing. The device is normally panel mounted and can feed up to 16 OPTIM trip units. Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit The solid-state (electronic) portable test kit provides verification of performance of all ratings of Digitrip 310 electronic trip units installed in circuit breakers while in service under varying load and/or phase imbalance. The test kit operates on 10-volt, 50/60 Hz power; it includes complete instructions and test times for testing long time, short time/instantaneous operation and optional ground fault operation of the circuit breaker. V4-T-306 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

192 .3 Breaker Interface Module (BIM) The Breaker Interface Module (BIM) is a panel mounted user interface device that is mounted on the front of an electrical assembly or at a remote location. The BIM is used to access, configure, test and display information for OPTIM trip units and other devices. The BIM consists of four display windows, eight function buttons, 18 LEDs, and a graphical time/current curve to provide breaker status, operational information, protection status and energy monitoring. A 4 Vdc power supply is required to provide power to the BIM. This is supplied by the switchboard builder to Eaton s specifications. The BIM is a member of Eaton s PowerNet family of communicating devices that connects OPTIM trip units, Digitrip RMS 810/910 trip units and energy sentinels as a subnetwork system. The BIM can also be connected to a main network via a PONI module to PowerNet software. Digitrip OPTIMizer The Digitrip OPTIMizer is a hand-held programmer that is used to access, configure, test and display information from OPTIM trip units. The OPTIMizer plugs into the front of an OPTIM trip unit via an eight-pin telephone jack and is powered by a nine-volt battery or the auxiliary power module. One highlighted feature is the Copy and Download commands. Setting up multiple OPTIM trips can be finished in minutes and with no errors. An Auxiliary Power Module connection provides a trip test when control power is not present at the breaker. The OPTIMizer is supplied as a standard package to include the programmer, the eightpin connection cord, battery and carrying case. The auxiliary power module is optional. Auxiliary Power Module The auxiliary power module is a power supply requiring 10 Vac input at 50 or 60 Hz that provides a 3 Vdc output. The auxiliary power module provides control power for testing an OPTIM trip unit when other means of control power is not available or for continuous OPTIMizer operation versus temporary with a battery. The auxiliary power module connects into the top of the Digitrip OPTIMizer via a keyed receptacle. The main application for the auxiliary power module would be for the testing of a standalone non-communicating OPTIM breaker that ordinarily would not have control power. Cause of Trip Display/Remote Mount Cause of Trip Display The Cause of Trip Display can be field-installed on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit. The device provides breaker information through an LCD screen, such as cause of trip, phrase current, ground current and low loads. The display is ideal for troubleshooting common trips such as ground fault, long delay, and instantaneous/short delay. The DIGIVIEW version will provide a local display at the breaker without additional wiring by connecting directly onto the trip unit. The DIGIVIEWR06 version has a 6 foot cable that allows users to mount the display on the outside of an enclosure door and connect to the trip unit that is contained inside the enclosure. Cause of Trip LED Module The Cause of Trip LED Module can be field-installed on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit. The device provides a cause of trip indication via LED. The Cause of Trip LED Module connects directly onto the trip unit. When the breaker trips, the module indicates the cause of trip (long delay, short delay, instantaneous and ground) via LED indication. The module is reset after the breaker is reset. Note: The OPTIMizer can work off of 3 Vdc control power, although 4 Vdc is the standard on OPTIM breakers. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-307

193 .3 Product Selection Termination Hardware End Cap Kit End Cap Kit End Cap Kit Thread Type Termination Hardware Keeper Nut F-Frame Keeper Nut K-Frame Keeper Nut F-Frame Keeper Nut K-Frame Keeper Nut Thread Type Thread Size Note L-, M-, N-Frames not required. Terminals are threaded. Two-Pole F-Frame (5A) Imperial 10 3 KPEK1 Metric M 5 KPEKM1 Three-Pole F-Frame (5A) Imperial 10 3 KPEK1 Metric M 5 KPEKM1 Four-Pole F-Frame (5A) Imperial 10 3 KPEK14 Metric M 5 KPEKM14 Three-Pole J-Frame Imperial KPEK Metric M 8 KPEKM Four-Pole J-Frame Imperial KPEK4 Metric M 8 KPEKM4 Three-Pole K-Frame Imperial KPEK3 Metric M 8 KPEKM3 Four-Pole K-Frame Imperial KPEK34 Metric M 8 KPEKM34 Three-Pole L-Frame Imperial KPEK4 Metric M-8 KPEKM4 Four-Pole L-Frame Imperial KPEK44 Metric M 8 KPEKM44 Thread Type Thread Size Imperial 10 3 KPR1A Metric M 5 KPR1AM Thread Size Package of 1 (Priced Individually) Line/Load End Imperial Line KPR3A Load KPR3B Package of 3 Metric M 8 Line KPR3AM Load KPR3BM V4-T-308 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

194 .3 Termination Hardware J-Frame Plug Nut K-Frame Terminal Adapter J-Frame Plug Nut K-Frame Terminal Adapter 1 F-Frame Ordering Information Terminals must be ordered separately. Priced individually. F-Frame Kit Thread Type F-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit J- and K-Frame Ordering Information Terminals must be ordered separately. Priced individually. J- and K-Frame Kit J- and K-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit L-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit AWG Wire Range/ Conductors 1 K-Frame terminal adapter for use in replacing LB/DA breakers. Not for use with T50KB terminals. 3 Individually packed. 4 Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover. 5 Two-pole kit. 6 Three-pole kit. 7 Four-pole kit. Thread Size Imperial PLN Metric M 6 PLNM Line/Load End Line and load Description TAD3 s Package of 6 Package of 1 control wire terminal tangs. 150 FCWTK Description Package of 1 control wire terminal tangs. Al/Cu 3/0 350 kcmil () Cu kcmil () Al/Cu kcmil () Al/Cu kcmil () Al/Cu kcmil () 5 FCWTK5 Metric Wire Range mm KCWTK TA60LDCW T60LDCW TA603LDKCW TA603LDKCW TA603LDKCW 47 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-309

195 .3 Termination Hardware Multiwire Connectors G-Frame Control Wire Terminal Description Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information (Package of 3) Rear Fed Terminals Frame s Base Mounting Hardware Ordering Information Hardware for surface mounting of circuit breakers is supplied only on request. Hardware consists of mounting screws and lockwashers. Order hardware for circuit breaker pole configurations as required. Mounting Hardware Control wire terminal (kit of 1) 565B38G01 GCWTK s Wires per Terminal Wire Size Range AWG Cu Kit 1 G-Frame TA100G3K TA100G6K F-Frame TA150F3K TA150F6K J-Frame TA50J3K TA50J6K K-Frame /0 3TA400K3K TA400K6K Wire Size Range AWG Cu 1 FD /0 TA150FDRF /0 3TA150FDRF kcmil TA5FDRF kcmil 3TA5FDRF KD kcmil TA350KRF kcmil 3TA350KRF MDL 800 3/0 MAX (3) TA800MDLRF Screw Length in Inches (mm) 800 3/0 MAX (3) 3TA800MDLRF G-Frame x.63 (3.5 x 66.7 mm) Std. 64B375G x 3.00 (3.5 x 76. mm) 8703C80G05 1 When catalog number starts with a 3, it indicates a kit with three terminals in each kit. number beginning with a TA indicates one terminal. GD breakers require special tapping for multiwire lugs, as described in the IL or use with standard aluminum collars. V4-T-310 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

196 .3 Imperial Thread Mounting Hardware of Poles Metric Thread Mounting Hardware Note Description 1 One set of hardware for two circuit breakers. Type of Mounting F-Frame x inch pan-head steel screws, lockwashers and clamps Individual 64B375G01 Group 1 64B375G x 1.5-inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual 418B80G01 3, x 1.5-inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH1 J-Frame, 3, x.75 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH K-Frame, 3, x 1.5 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH3 L-Frame, 3, x 1.5 inch filister-head steel screws and lockwashers and flat washers Individual BMH4 M-Frame, x 1.5 inch filister-head steel screws and lockwashers and flat washers Individual BMH5 N-Frame, 3, x 1.5 inch pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH5 R-Frame Supplied by customer of Poles Description Type of Mounting F-Frame 1 M4 0.7 x 80 mm pan-head steel screws, lockwashers, and clamps Individual 418B80G09 Group 1 418B80G10 M4 0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual 418B80G11 3, 4 M4 0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH1M J-Frame, 3, 4 M6 0.7 x 70 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMHM K-Frame, 3, 4 M6 0.7 x 38 mm pan-head steel screws and lockwashers Individual BMH3M L-Frame, 3 Individual BMH4M M-Frame, 3 Individual BMH5M N-Frame, 3 Individual BMH5M R-Frame Supplied by customer Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-311

197 .3 Terminal Shields F-Frame J-Frame G-Frame Terminal Shield Units in Package F-Frame Terminal Shield Standard (Package of 10) (Priced Individually) J-Frame Terminal Shield 10 GTSK3 of Poles Location 1 Line 65B9G06 Line 65B9G07 3 Line 65B9G08 410B95G01 4 Line 65B9G09 410B95G0 of Poles Location (Package of 10), 3 Line End 166C07G01 4 Line End 6631C01G01, 3 Load End 6641C16G01 4 Load End 6641C16G0 Special For Use When Electrical Operator is Mounted on Circuit Breaker V4-T-31 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

198 .3 K-Frame K-Frame Terminal Shield L-Frame Terminal Shield (Package of 1) 314C40G05 M-Frame Terminal Shield N-Frame Terminal Shield Terminal End Covers Ordering Information The terminal end cover is available for three-pole circuit breakers only. Two conductor opening sizes are available. Specify quantity (one per circuit breaker) when ordering. F-Frame of Poles Location F-Frame Terminal End Covers (Package of 10), 3 Line TS33LN 4 Line TS34LN 3 Load TS33LD (Package of 1) 08B966G01 (Package of 1) NTS3K Conductor Opening Diameter in Inches (mm) 0.5 (6.35 mm) TEC (10.41 mm) TEC Interphase Barriers Ordering Information Two per package. Interphase Barrier Base Mounting Plate Base Mounting Plate DIN Rail Adapter DIN Rail Adapter Key Operated Attachment Key Operated Attachment Interphase Barriers Frame F Base Mounting Plate G-Frame GD/GHC DIN Rail Adapter G-Frame GD/GHC All Metal DIN Rail Adapter G-Frame GD/GHC Key Operated Attachment G-Frame GD/GHC Note 1 For use on three-pole breakers only. IPB1 J, K IPB3 L IPB4 M IPB4 N of Units in Package IPB5 1 07B513G01 of Poles of Units in Package 1, 10 15C79G C79G0 1 of Poles of Units in Package 3 1 EGGDDIN of Units in Package 10 GKOA Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-313

199 .3 Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable) Lock Dog (Non- Padlockable) Non-Padlockable Handle Block Non-Padlockable Handle Block Padlockable Handle Padlockable Handle Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable) G-Frame GD/GHC/GHB/GMCP of Units in Package 1 194C01H01 Handle Tie G-Frame GHB/GHC of Poles of Units in Package 10 HTBGDP 3 10 HTBGD3P Non-Padlockable Handle Block Frame F LKD1 J, K LKD3 L, M, N LKD4 Padlockable G-Frame GD/GHC/GHB of Units in Package C77G C77G C77G06 Padlockable Handle Lock Padlockable Handle Lock Padlockable Handle Lock Frame Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Frame 1 Accepts 0.85 Lock Shank. Padlockable in the OFF position only. G GPHBOFF J, K PHB3 F PHL1 V4-T-314 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

200 .3 Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Cylinder Lock Cylinder Lock Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp Description Cylinder Lock Frame Note 1 For padlockable handle lock hasp to padlock handle in OFF position only, order either catalog number. F-Frame Single-pole breakers PHL1 Two-, three- and four-pole breakers PLK1 For left side mounting PLK1LOFF For right side mounting PLK1ROFF J, K-Frames Two-, three- and four-pole breakers PLK3 For left side mounting PLK3LOFF 1 For right side mounting PLK3ROFF 1 L-Frame (Side Mounted) Lock ON or OFF HLK4 Lock OFF only (left-hand mount) HLK4LOFF 1 L-Frame (Top Mounted) Lock ON or OFF HLK4S Lock OFF only HLK4SOFF 1 M-Frame Lock ON or OFF HLK4 Lock OFF only (left-hand mount) HLK4LOFF 1 M-Frame (Vertical Mounting) Lock ON/OFF HLK4S Lock OFF only HLK4SOFF N-Frame Side mounted PLK5 Top mounted (ON/OFF) PLK5S Top mounted (OFF only) PLK5SOFF 1 R-Frame Lock ON/OFF HLK6 Lock OFF only HLK6OFF 1 F, J, K Order by description Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-315

201 .3 Key Interlock Kit Ordering Information Key interlock kits contain the necessary interface and hardware to install a trapped key interlock from one of the listed manufacturers. Key interlocks are not installed or supplied as part of the breaker, and must be obtained separately from the lock manufacturer or through the manufacturer of the equipment on which the breaker will be installed. Select the mounting kit catalog number to match the type of lock used. Key Interlock Kit photo position Key Interlock Kit (Trapped Key Interlock) Lock Manufacturer Lock Type Bolt Projection in Withdrawn Position in Inches (mm) Kit F-Frame Superior B (9.5) KYK1 Kirk F 0.38 (9.5) KYK1 Castell 1 K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTK1 J, K-Frames Superior B (9.5) KYK3 Kirk F 0.38 (9.5) KYK3 Castell 1 K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTK3 L-, M-, N-Frames Superior B (9.5) KYK4 Kirk F 0.38 (9.5) KYK4 Castell 1 K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTK4 R-Frame Superior B (5.4) KYK6 Kirk F 1.0 (5.4) KYK6 Castell 1 K or QK 1.0 (5.4) CTK6 JG-Frame Superior B (9.5) KYKJG Kirk F 0.38 (9.5) KYKJG Castell 1 K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTKJG LG-Frame Superior B (9.5) KYKLG Kirk F 0.38 (9.5) KYKLG Castell 1 K or QK 0.38 (9.5) CTKLG Note 1 When ordering Castell Interlock, it is necessary for customer to specify that the mounting bolt holes must be 10 mm in diameter V4-T-316 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

202 .3 Sliding Bar Interlock Ordering Information The sliding bar interlock is available for mounting between two adjacent threepole circuit breakers with circuit breakers centerline Sliding Bar Interlock Walking Beam Interlock Ordering Information The walking beam interlock is available for mounting between two adjacent circuit breakers spaced 1/4-inch (6.4 mm) apart and having the same pole configuration. The two circuit breakers must be factory modified to accept the walking beam interlock assembly (suitable for use with either two-, three- or four-pole circuit breakers). Walking Beam Interlock Sliding Bar Interlock Centerline Spacing Frame in Inches (mm) Walking Beam Interlock Frame Note 1 Three-pole only. spacing as indicated in table and enclosure front panel thickness of 1/8 or 3/16 inch (3. or 4.8 mm). (For field installation only.) F 4.19 (106.4) SBK1 J 4.38 (111.3) SBK K 5.75 (146.0) SBK3 L, M 8.50 (15.9) SBK4 N 8.50 (15.9) SBK5 F With properly modified circuit breakers, the walking beam interlock is suitable for field installation. Order circuit breakers specifying modification for walking beam (0% price adder) and select walking beam interlock from table below. Circuit breakers and walking beam interlock are boxed and shipped separately. WBL1 K WBL3 L, M WBL4A N R 1 WBL5 WBL6 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-317

203 .3 Electrical Operator F-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Terminal Block Voltage Frequency 10 AC EOP1T07 EOP1P07 40 AC EOP1T11 EOP1P11 F-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator 1 Voltage J-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Terminal Block K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Terminal Block K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Base Mounting Kit Frame L- and M-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator (310 and OPTIM) Terminal Block Note Frequency 10 50/60 Hz AC MOPFD10C 4 DC MOPFD4D 15 DC MOPFD10C /60 Hz MOPFD40C 0 50 DC MOPFD40C Operating Voltage Frequency 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Lead 10 50/60 Hz AC EOPT /60 Hz AC EOPT11 Operating Voltage Frequency 10 50/60 Hz AC EOP3MT /60 Hz AC EOP3MT11 K Operating Voltage BBMK3 Frequency 10 50/60 Hz EOP4MT /60 Hz EOP4MT /60 Hz EOP4MT11A /60 Hz EOP4MT15 15 DC EOP4MT6 4 DC EOP4MT1 1 Motor operators MOP1P07, MOP1P03DC, MOP1P05DC and MOP1P07DC are replaced by MOPFD motor operators listed in table. 18-Inch (457. mm) Pigtail Lead V4-T-318 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

204 .3 N-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Operating Voltage R-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Plug-In Adapters J-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type) K-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type) 600 Vac Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Frequency ampere maximum. Use three-pole mounting plate for two-pole circuit breaker. Pigtail Leads 10 50/60 Hz EOP5T /60 Hz EOP5T /60 Hz EOP5T /60 Hz EOP5T15 4 DC EOP5T1 48 DC EOP5T 15 DC EOP5T6 Operating Voltage Frequency 10 50/60 Hz EOP6T08K 40 50/60 Hz EOP6T11K 48 DC EOP6T1K Factory-Installed Terminal Block F-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type) Continuous Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Current (s) D13G D13G0 1480D13G07 1 Mounting plate 176C511H01 507C047H01 Continuous Current (s) Terminal End Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole 50 Line 160C86G05 160C86G06 131C67G01 Load 160C86G07 160C86G08 131C67G0 One line and one load 506C144G7 506C144G8 Mounting plate PMP3 Continuous Current (s) 400 PAD3 PAD33 Mounting plate PMP33 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-319

205 .3 L-Frame (Threaded Stud Type) Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole Continuous Current (s) M-Frame (Flat Bar Type) 600 Vac Two-Pole N-Frame (Flat Bar Type) Two-Pole Plug-In Adapters 600 (threaded stud type) 506C059G03 506C059G04 PAD (flat bar type) 188C19G01 188C19G0 6636C55H01 Mounting plate 504C84H01 504C84H01 Continuous Current (s) Three-Pole D53G05 614D53G06 Mounting plate 190C73H01 190C73H01 Continuous Current (s) Three-Pole D53G03 614D53G04 Mounting plate 190C73H01 190C73H01 Frame of Poles Standard Certification FD 3 IEC PAD3F FD 4 IEC PAD4F JD 3 IEC PAD3JD KD 3 IEC PAD3K LD 3 IEC PAD3LD LD 4 IEC PAD4LD V4-T-30 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

206 .3 Rear Connecting Studs F-Frame 1 Stud J-Frame 1 Stud K-Frame 1 Stud Stud Tube For 15 to 100 Circuit Breakers 100 A short 451D874G01 3B9446H0 100 A short 451D874G01 3B9446H1 100 A short 451D874G01 3B9446H 100 A short 451D874G01 3B9446H3 100 A long 451D874G0 3B9446H4 100 A long 451D874G0 3B9446H5 100 A long 451D874G0 3B9446H6 100 A long 451D874G0 3B9446H7 For 110 to 5 Circuit Breakers 5A short 374D883G01 374D883H06 5A short 374D883G01 374D883H07 5A short 374D883G01 374D883H08 5A short 374D883G01 374D883H09 5A long 374D883G0 374D883H10 5A long 374D883G0 374D883H11 5A long 374D883G0 374D883H1 5A long 374D883G0 374D883H13 Stud Tube 50A short 5010D3G01 456D983H05 50A short 5010D3G01 456D983H06 50A short 5010D3G01 456D983H07 50A long 5010D3G0 5010D3H05 50A long 5010D3G0 5010D3H06 50A long 5010D3G0 5010D3H07 Stud Standard Tube 400 A short 664C14G0 313C909H A short 664C14G04 313C909H A short 664C14G06 313C909H A long 664C14G03 313C909H0 400 A long 664C14G05 313C909H1 400 A long 664C14G07 313C909H L-Frame Ordering Information Stud 314C960G07 314C960G08 314C960G09 M-Frame Ordering Information 1 Stud Note 1 Not UL listed. Stud 5 314C960G C960G C960G C960G C960G C960G C960G C960G C960G C960G1 N-Frame Ordering Information 1 Stud Stud BG BG BG B375G B375G03 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-31

207 .3 Panelboard Connecting Straps F-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Bus Spacing in Inches (mm) Continuous Current (s) F-Frame Mounting Bracket J-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps K-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps K-Frame Mounting Bracket Pole Connector Type Center Outside.75 (69.9) B14G0 673B14G09.75 (69.9) B14G0 673B14G10.75 (69.9) B14G04 673B14G (88.9) C7G01 153C7G (88.9) C73G03 153C73G (88.9) C73G01 153C73G05 of Poles 64B600H0 3 64B600H01 Bus Spacing in Inches (mm) Continuous Current (s) Pole Connector Type Center Outside 3.50 (88.9) D6G01 600D6G0 Bus Spacing in Inches (mm) Continuous Current (s) Pole Connector Type Center Outside 3.50 (88.9) B78G0 41B77G01 of Poles, 3 08B64H01 V4-T-3 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

208 .3 L-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps Pole Connector Type Continuous Current Center Outside (s) B609G01 506C05G01 L-Frame Mounting Bracket of Poles M-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps M-Frame Mounting Bracket 315C70H01 N-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps N-Frame Mounting Bracket (Four Required) 315C70H01, 3 08B97H01 Bus Spacing in Inches (mm) Continuous Current (s) Connector Type Pole Connector Type 3.50 (88.9) 800 Short 314C996G01 Bus Spacing in Inches (mm) Continuous Current (s) Medium Long Connector Type 314C996G0 314C996G03 Pole Connector Type 3.50 (88.9) 100 Short 505C606G04 Medium Long 505C606G05 505C606G06 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-33

209 .3 Type LFD Current Limiter The LFD current limiter is an accessory that bolts to the load end of a standard FDB or FD thermal-magnetic and electronic circuit breaker, providing 00,000 A Type LFD Current Limiter Ground Fault Alarm Unit The ground fault alarm unit is a remotely mounted device with a combination indicating light/test button that will light when the breaker trips or alarms on ground fault. The ground fault alarm unit requires a separate 10 Vac power source to power the Ground Fault Alarm Unit Type LFD Current Limiter Circuit Breaker s GF Alarm Unit IQ Energy Sentinel The IQ Energy Sentinel is a highly accurate, microprocessor-based, breaker-mounted device designed to monitor power and energy readings. It represents an alternative to watt meters, watt-hour meters, and watt demand meters. Key advantages include savings in space, lower installation costs, and remote monitoring capability. interrupting capacity at up to 600 Vac. LFD current limiters for thermal-magnetic circuit breakers are listed with Underwriters Laboratories under File E LFD3070R LFD3150R Description Ground fault alarm unit Face mounting bracket light and the internal relay, which has 1NO and 1NC contacts for remote indication. The ground fault alarm unit can be panel mounted for ordering with an optional face mounting bracket. For use on Digitrip 310 only, K- through N-Frame. GFAU 164C67G01 The IQ Energy Sentinel mounts on the load side of a F-Frame (150 ampere) circuit breaker. It can be applied on three-phase, four-wire systems, or singlephase, three-wire systems with voltage connected through Phases A and C. For more information, see Descriptive Bulletin Potential Transformer Module The potential transformer module is required for the Digitrip OPTIM 1050 to provide a voltage input to allow the trip unit to monitor power and energy as well as power factor. The potential transformer module is a 6 VA transformer with a primary voltage input of up to 600 volt Potential Transformer Module line to line. Three 0.1 ampere fuses are provided on the primary of the transformer and can be used for isolation purposes during dielectric testing. The device is normally panel mounted and can feed up to 16 OPTIM trip units. Potential Transformer Module Description Potential transformer module Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit The solid-state (electronic) 50/60 Hz power; it includes portable test kit provides complete instructions and verification of performance of test times for testing long all ratings of Digitrip 310 time, short time/ electronic trip units installed instantaneous operation in circuit breakers while in and optional ground fault service under varying load operation of the circuit and/or phase imbalance. The breaker. test kit operates on 10-volt, Portable Test Kit Description Solid-state (electronic) portable test kit DOPTMLN STK V4-T-34 Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October 015

210 .3 Breaker Interface Module (BIM) The Breaker Interface Module (BIM) is a panel mounted user interface device that is mounted on the front of an electrical assembly or at a remote location. The BIM is used to access, configure, test and display information for OPTIM trip units and other devices. The BIM consists of four display windows, eight function buttons, 18 LEDs, and a graphical time/current curve to provide breaker status, operational information, protection status and energy monitoring. A 4 Breaker Interface Module (BIM) Digitrip OPTIMizer The Digitrip OPTIMizer is a hand-held programmer that is used to access, configure, test and display information from OPTIM trip units. The OPTIMizer plugs into the front of an OPTIM trip unit via an eight-pin telephone jack and is powered by a nine-volt battery or the auxiliary power module. One highlighted feature is the Copy and Download commands. Setting up multiple OPTIM trips can be finished in minutes and with no errors. An Auxiliary Power Module connection provides a trip test when control power is not present at the breaker. The OPTIMizer is supplied as a standard package to include Digitrip OPTIMizer Vdc power supply is required to provide power to the BIM. This is supplied by the switchboard builder to Eaton s specifications. The BIM is a member of Eaton s PowerNet family of communicating devices that connects OPTIM trip units, Digitrip RMS 810/910 trip units and energy sentinels as a subnetwork system. The BIM can also be connected to a main network via a PONI module to PowerNet software. Breaker Interface Module (BIM) BIMII Digitrip OPTIMizer OPTIMizer standard package the programmer, the eightpin connection cord, battery and carrying case. The auxiliary power module is optional. Note: 4 Vdc Power Supply A 4 Vdc power supply is required for all Digitrip OPTIM trip units that are required to communicate either on the main Eaton PowerNet network or as a subnetwork to a BIM. The breaker s load is 45 ma of current. Typically one power supply is required per switchboard and can provide control power to a BIM and the OPTIM trip units. The 4 Vdc power supply should be an isolated high quality power supply with a CE label, and is normally provided by the switchboard manufacturer to Eaton s recommendations. Auxiliary Power Module The auxiliary power module is a power supply requiring 10 Vac input at 50 or 60 Hz that provides a 3 Vdc output. The auxiliary power module provides control power for testing an OPTIM trip unit when other means of control power is not available or for continuous OPTIMizer operation versus temporary with a battery. The auxiliary Auxiliary Power Module Auxiliary Power Module PRTBAPMDV power module connects into the top of the Digitrip OPTIMizer via a keyed receptacle. The main application for the auxiliary power module would be for the testing of a standalone non-communicating OPTIM breaker that ordinarily would not have control power. Cause of Trip Display/Remote Mount Cause of Trip Display The Cause of Trip Display can The DIGIVIEW version will be field-installed on any provide a local display at the Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit. breaker without additional The device provides breaker wiring by connecting directly information through an LCD onto the trip unit. The screen, such as cause of trip, DIGIVIEWR06 version has a phrase current, ground 6 foot cable that allows users current and low loads. The to mount the display on the display is ideal for outside of an enclosure door troubleshooting common and connect to the trip unit trips such as ground fault, that is contained inside the long delay, and enclosure. instantaneous/short delay. Cause of Trip LED Module The Cause of Trip LED Module can be field-installed on any Digitrip RMS 310+ trip unit. The device provides a cause of trip indication via LED. The Cause of Trip LED Module connects directly onto the trip unit. When the Cause of Trip Display/Remote Mount Cause of Trip Display DIGIVIEW DIGIVIEWR06 Cause of Trip LED Module TRIP-LED breaker trips, the module indicates the cause of trip (long delay, short delay, instantaneous and ground) via LED indication. The module is reset after the breaker is reset. Volume 4 Circuit Protection CA E October V4-T-35